Home

Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SA series touch

Contents

1. Corresponding to New Screen command used to create a new screen in the current project current screen configuration that has been changed with the file name and directory being the same Corresponding to Save command with the shortcut key of Ctrl S used to save the as the original Corresponding to Compile command used to check the configuration project created by the user and prepare for downloading Corresponding to Undo command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Z used to cancel the last operation Corresponding to Redo command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Z used to recover the last operation Corresponding to Cut command with the shortcut key of Ctrl X used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area 5 Corresponding to Copy command with the shortcut key of Ctrl C used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area Corresponding to Paste command with the shortcut key of Ctrl V used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen x Corresponding to Delete command with the shortcut key of Ctrl Del used to delete a chosen object from the screen Corresponding to Rotary command used to rotate the chosen object The rotary manners include free rotation horizontal rotation and vertical rotation Corresponding to Move object forward command
2. Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 If the PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 392 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 26 Connection between ADVANTECH distributed I O and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of ADVANTECH distributed I O series PLC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of ADVANTECH distributed I O series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communica
3. 9 pin serial port FUJI NB Series WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 337 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samkoon touch screen COM or COM2 FUJI NB CPU RS422 DB9 pin female programming port Communication cable type CA_NB 2 Software setting PLC communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen PLC station address is not required The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Stop bit length Parity check bit 338 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Operational address range oe eoe Bis pare T read Thh Timer coil Elapsed value of timer Elapsed value of counter hh indicates hexadecimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever
4. compunicatio ES 232 signal un port 299 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 9 8 Connection mode of One screen with multiple devices Communication Port Properties Link ID Link Hame Link Type Direct Connection Serial Fort Fee eee Device Server Modbus Links Bord COM PLC contiguous address interval 16 Figure 9 9 Select touch screen as primary station Communication Port Properties General Parameter Communication Parameters Other Baud rate gegi HMI Address Data bits 5 PLC Address Check Communication Time Stop Bits Retry Address Model Extended Hode v 300 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 9 10 Select expanded mode when touch screen is primary station PC address in communication port attribute will become invalid when the system is set as per above method When user clicks input address on some controls the address input window as shown in figure 9 11 will pop up Select the drop down menu on left of register name The number selected after clicking the drop down menu is just the slave station address of PLC Address Entry E l 2 4 4 a B T E J l 23 RS232 cannot support the connection mode of multi drop Therefore when PLC in mode one screen with multiple devices doesn t support port RS485 it is necessary to configure communication adapter to conver
5. Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Select Hitachi and EH series PLC in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly Operational address range Operational address is determined when a Hitachi EH series PLC 1s connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs an extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of Hitachi EH series PLC and operate as the following I O assignment Slot 0 X48 Slot 1 Y32 X0 X12 external input of bit Y100 Y109 Y hhh external output of bit RO RIC2 R hhh internal input of bit MO M4000 read write M hhhh internal output of bit and share bit word with WM WRO read write WR hhhh internal output of bit WR1000 WMO read write WM hhhh internal output of bit and WM400 share bit word with WM hhh indicates hexadecimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 372 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is
6. 2 Software setting Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model ZHENGHANG Select the corresponding PLC for different models At Electronics A5 present Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports Series ZHENGHANG AS series PLC Communication RS232 Adopt standard RS232 serial communication port Baud rate 9600 Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Checkout None Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for 390 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Touch screen It 1s valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave address station and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screens Adopt defaults in general PLC address l It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to seve
7. 2 8 Basic operations of SamDraw This chapter introduces some basic operations of SamDraw configuration editing software and briefly introduces the use and shortcut key of SamDraw mouse 2 8 1 Mouse operation When preparing configuration screens using mouse the mouse is as shown in Figure 2 39 left button Now we introduce common mouse operations and the functions of such operations in the software Left click The process of pressing down the left key and Figure 2 39 Sketch of mouse 61 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 then releasing is called Left click in this Manual It can be used to select menu items select object select tool button edit configuration and confirm setting Double click The process of quickly and continuously clicking the left key twice is called Double click in this Manual It can be used to set properties for placed objects set properties of screen and window set properties of touch screen connection change settings of the touch screen create historical data collection create recipe and create alarm control After such clicking a dialog will appear for operation Right click The process of pressing down the right key of mouse and then releasing is called Right click in this Manual You can open a right click drop down menu by right clicking an object or open a right click menu by right clicking a blank space In addition
8. 3 The loop body may be void statement include stdio h void main int n 0 printf input a string n for getchar n n printf od n j In this example the expression 1 in for statement is omitted and the expression 3 is not for modifying loop variable but for inputting the characters counting Thus the counting that should be completed in loop body has completed in the expression Therefore the loop body is void statement Pay attention the semicolon behind void statement is essential If this semicolon is missed the following printf statement will be executed as loop body On the other hand if the loop body is not void statement it is forbidden to add semicolon behind the bracket of expression In this case the loop body will be regarded as void statement and not executed repeatedly All of these are the common mistakes in programming which must be attached great importance 5 2 6 break statement Break statement is used in switch statement or loop statement only It is for exiting switch statement or local loop and directing to the subsequent program As the transferring direction of break statement is specific the statement marks are not required The general form of break statement 1s break As shown in the above example the break statement is used in switch statement and for statement for skip Break statement provides several exits for loop statement which makes programming more flexible and conv
9. Click OK after the completion of setting Click the icon Historical Record Displayer in toolbar and set the display line to be 5 in popped up dialog box Values of all other attributes are default value A table will generate automatically in screen after clicking OK as shown in figure 7 15 274 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 7 15 Display data table in historical data collector Above table has following applications J Date read date of some address value J Time read time of some address value Column kui display value of LW1 address read at some time Column View display value of LW2 address read at some time VJ Column 3 display value of LW4 address read at some time Column 4 display value of LW5 address read at some time J Column 5 display value of LW7 address read at some time 1 When number of reading some address value is more than number of lines displayed by Historical Data Displayer the previous data will be covered by later ones 7 6 Alarm Setting 7 6 1 Digital alarm log Alarm setting is used to display alarm information Alarm controls and dynamic alarm bar In fact alarm controls and dynamic alarm bar respectively display the alarm information of Digital Alarm and Analog Alarm can be used normally only when alarm setting is configured Select Alarm Log in project manager to set d
10. Next after confirmation to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 6 4 254 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Rew Link Connection Te Were com Link Link Type Direct Connection Serial Port Devi ce Server z o w FX 2N CPU Fort Link Fort PLO contiguous qi WATSUSHITA EF 3 DELTA ix MODICON EIEE KIN e Allen Bradley LG Figure 6 4 Dialog box for communication connection setting of new item In this example Mitsubishi PLC is taken as device Users can select PLC of other models in option Device Service as required and select different model of the PLC behind the option After completion of setting click Next to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 6 5 253 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Hew Screen Screen Hame Backer ound Monochrome Background Color Figure 6 5 Dialog box of adding new screen for new project In this dialog box users can change name of screen in column Screen Name and background color of screen in column Background Color After completion of setting click Finish to finish creation of project as shown 1n figure 6 6 256 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SamDraes 3 Cc ite dew File Edii E Ws ar Tir ww IT Oj ect Srreen F Setting 51 Damnlasd 07 Help H Cee bl gt T JEF rE eee ee ee e A BE at D
11. Pattern Fiz Color Border Color 13 04 12 BG Pattern E Salid Format ddfnm yy Font Size 16 Text Color ne Alignment C Left Center Right Figure 4 84 Date Display dialog J Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Format Format of date display including 9 formats that is dd mm yy mm dd yy yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy and yy mm dd where yy represents year mm represents month and dd represents day Font Here you can choose common font or digital font Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs Text color Here you can change the color of the date display text 153 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alignment Here you can have the date displayed on left side on right side or in the middle gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become AA Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 15 Day of week display Day of week Display control 1s mainly used to display day of week Click Day of week Display control icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 85 will appear Day ot Feek Display retier al Text ID RTT Shape State 0 Border Color Fiz Color BG Color Pattern Selia Figure 4 85
12. for convenience of the operation It will not change the variable type in the data declaration 5 1 3 Basic operator and expression Category priority and associativity of operator There are many operators and expressions in C language which is seldom in the high level language It is the rich operator and expression that complete the C language This is one of main 202 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 features of C language The operators of C language have different priorities In addition they have individual associativity In the expression the data for operation should not only conform to the priority of operators but also subjected to the associativity so as to confirm the operation direction from left to right or from right to left This associativity is unavailable for other high level language which increases the complexity of C language Operator Category The operators of C language can be classified as following l Arithmetic operator It is used for different data operations including addition subtraction multiplication and division or modular arithmetic increment and decrement Relational operator It is used for comparison operation including greater than gt less than lt equal to be equal or greater than gt be equal or less than lt and unequal to Logical operator It is used for logical op
13. communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Checkout EVEN Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Stop bit Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Touch screen It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave address station and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screens Adopt defaults in general PLC address It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Timeout The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates that the touch screen pops up communication failure without corresponding recovery within 2 seconds Generally the defaults are adopted Address standard It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general No Select YOKOGAWA and FA series in the drop down list of devic
14. definitions basing on different state types chosen by user The operation steps are as follows 156 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Click Picture Display icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 88 will appear Picture Display General Picture Visibility mo A State Type Bit Value auto Change Monitor Address Total States Figure 4 88 Picture Display dialog Bit When this option is checked there are totally two states that are 0 and 1 and the monitored address can be bit address only Then this control will display corresponding picture basing on 0 1 state of the monitored address Value When this option is checked the total number of states can be up to 32 and the different pictures can be displayed basing on the value of the monitored address If the value of the monitored address is 0 picture of state 1 will be displayed and so forth Auto change When this option is checked the total number of states can be up to 32 and the control needs not to display picture basing on the value of the monitored address but display pictures in turn within the range of the total state number set by the user after the user defines a picture for each state sets Auto Change Frequency and downloads the setting to HMI 157 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Picture tab of Picture Di
15. off line simulation you can also press ESC on keyboard to exit off line simulation About about dialog box 251 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 You can close off line simulation through taskbar Right Key Close e Example of off line simulation As shown in figure 6 2 below you can carry out the off line simulation of edited configuration Use mouse to click value display and input It can be seen that pointer of instrument panel points to 70 if you enter 70 The project designer can better check and find some problems in project configuration screen through off line simulation such as the correctness of selected monitoring address and relationship between controls to ensure good preparations Controls for value input and display Instrument monitoring address is D5 maximum value is 120 address of both write and monitor is D5 Samkoon Time controls Function button change user level bar graph monitoring address D5 Maximum value 120 Input and display of ASC words address for write and monitoring D5 GIF picture displayer Button for opening interface Text button write address D2 function 5 252 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 6 2 Example of SA 4 3A off line simulation 253 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software
16. shown in Figure 4 104 182 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Flow Block General Visibility Color Flow Block FG Color Flow Block EG Color x Pipe Fo Color Pipe BG Color Border Collar Fattern Trigger Address Attribute Display Type Horizontal Vertical Direction Left Blocks a Mo Border Speed Fast C General Slow Cm Figure 4 104 Flow Block dialog Color Here you can set the color of the flow block l 2 gt 6 Flow Block FG Color Click here to set the foreground color of the flow block Flow Block BFG Color Click here to set the background color of the flow block Pipe FG Color Click here to set the foreground color of the pipe Pipe BG Color Click here to set the background color of the pipe Border Color Click here to set the color of the border of the Flow Block control Pattern Click here to choose a pattern for the Flow Block Pure color by default Trigger address The address that triggers flowing of the Flow Block When the value of this address is 1 the Flow Block is flowing Attribute Here you can set attributes of the Flow Block such as direction and flow speed 183 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 l Display type If Horizontal option is checked the flow block flows horizontally if Vertical option is checked the flow block flows verticall
17. software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 308 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 3 Connection between EMERSON EC series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC register from EMERSON EC series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of EMERSON EC series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC in EC series includes EC10 EC10A EC20 series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port EC series Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable ON TM OFF A Petal WOH Tn i start and stop control FS ii Frotocol Switching 309 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA EMR 1 Switch the operation control ON TM OFF to ON and change the communication protocol of programming port to the set protocol MODBUS by force 2 Software setting Set the programming port to be MODBUS protocol in PLC programming
18. 2 4 Uninstall SamDraw configuration software 31 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 There are two uninstalling methods as introduced below The first method First select Start Program SamDraw3 3 in Windows and then select Uninstall option See Figure 2 9 Converter l trl S Sandraw3 3 fe Uninstall Seaniraws lt brt User manual Figure 2 9 Select Uninstall SamDraw3 3 Second click Yes in the pop up dialog and wait for automatic deletion of the software by Windows system After completion of the deletion process click OK button to end the uninstalling See Figure 2 10 and 2 11 Samira 3 Uninstall we Are You sure you vant to completely renove Sanlravd 3 and all of its components Figure 2 10 Confirm the uninstalling Sam rages 3 Uninstall Figure 2 11 Uninstalling completed The second method First click Start Setting Control Panel of Windows to open the control panel and click add delete programs Then a pop up dialog will appear See Figure 2 12 32 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Be FERENT au eee RE O Zapi HAS D am Me jg ot SDR 2020 04 toh Le omi MW Ecaltck Etharnet Diagnostic IMility mh 3 0248 g REALTEK GLE amp FE Ethernet PCI E SIC Drivar 2 SANA Sof Bowllek ligh Delia lian wWadio De iver w SonDraed
19. 4 3 Resolution 800x600 Brightness 450cd m Color 262 144 pigments Contrast 450 1 Service life of back light 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate Communication interface USB RS232 RS422 RS485 User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 7W Power consumption CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 1 000V AC 1 minute Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature for running 10 to 65 C Ambient humidity for running 10 to 90 RH non condensable Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 239x192x49 5 mm Opening dimension 234 187 mm Weight About 1 8kg Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 10 2 Main technical parameters Model SA 10 2 Display size 10 2 length width 16 9 Resolution 800x480 Brightness 500cd m Color 262 144 pigments Contrast 450 1 Service life of back light 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate Communication interface USB RS232 RS422 RS485 User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 7W Power consumption CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 1 000V AC 1 minute Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature for running 1
20. 6 Statement summary in C language Name General Form Simple statement Expression statement Void statement Conditional statement if expression statement if expression statement 1 else statement 2 if expression 1 statement 1 else if expression 2 statement 2 else statement n switch statement switch expression case constant statement statement default statement loop statement while statement while expression statement for statement for expression 1 expression 2 expression 3 statement break statement break continue statement continue return statement return expression 221 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 3 Macro Function Introduction This section will introduce the basic functions of macro and describe the relevant control functions and application method briefly 5 3 1 How to use macro function for programming There are ways to access macro Method 1 select Setting S gt Macro from the menu as shown in Figure 5 1 macro menu and pop up interface as shown in Figure 5 3 macro editor Townload Hely Preferences Setting lE Alarm Setting A d Recipe Setting E File Protection M Converter Global Macro Initial Macro Figure 5 1 Macro Menu Method 2 click shortcut button Macro as shown in Figure 5 2 Macro button and pop up interface as shown in Figure 5 3 Macro Editor 2 B22 295 S Figure 5 2
21. Day of week Display dialog J Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Click Text tab and you can modify text display properties here such as the text to be displayed such as changing Sunday to Chinese border interval font size text color word interval line interval blink and position See Figure 4 86 for Text tab of Day of Week Display 154 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Day of Feek Display General Text Border Interval fr Attribute Font Site i186 Mord ay Aagi Eana Tuesday k AE Wednesday Blink Thursday sm Friday Line Interval Satur day ford Interval Position 0 O aml F gl gt cs R Figure 4 86 Text tab of Day of Week Display 2l To modify the contents of the text first choose the item to be modified and then type in the new text in the edit box below gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become iL rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 16 Static picture Static Picture control is mainly used to display a picture either from the library of the system or from other files with different formats You can choose the picture source according to actual needs The picture loaded by this control can be used as a background of a graph to beautify the project inte
22. J High H when the address value of item is more than its limit and option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm Click some item in list box The meaning of option Use selected or not is same to that in Digital Alarm Log Users can refer to Use in Digital Alarm Log 7 7 Alarm Display Controls Select in toolbar and set the display content and parameter of alarm bar in its dialog box as shown in figure 7 22 281 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alarm Ear es General Visibility Border Color lessage BG Color Fiz Color Text Font Sire Text Color Attribute Speed Direction 2 Time COBy Time Reversal Figure 7 22 Dialog box of alarm bar Speed movement speed of alarm content Direction select the movement direction of alarm bar from right to left or left to right Alarm sort select the time sort of alarm content Select alarm controls in toolbar and set the content and parameter of alarm display in its dialog box as shown in figure 7 23 282 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alarm Display General Visibili Ly TT M Font Sige kes a Text Color Border Color Bee Forz Grid Title bar ertical Font Size 16 ry V Hor i zontal Font Color MM
23. Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 communication status read Indication of COMI Display current connection status of touch screen and PLC communication OFF communication failed NO communication successful status read 8 2 LW 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 Local time month Bcd code range of effective value 0 11 Local time year Bcd code range of effective value 0 9999 4005 4006 Local time week Bcd code range of effective value 1 7 Display the basic safety level of current 4007 Current system level windowl 8 4008 Display current authority password level 1 and Current system level level 2 password of effective value or password password 4009 of other levels 4010 Display level 1 password designated at the time Level 1 password 4011 of configuration display 4012 Display level 2 password designated at the time Level 2 password 4013 of configuration display 4014 Display level 3 password designated at the time Level 3 password 4015 of configuration display 4016 Display level 4 password designated at the time Level 4 password 4017 of configuration display 4018 Display level 5 password designated at the time Level 5 password 4019 of configuration display 291 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4020 Display level 6 password designated at the time Level 6 password 4021 of
24. Thus the part of this graph intersected with other graphs will be covered by other graphs Figure 4 10 shows a contrast before and after such moving The object of a back twice Obj ect moved a The object of a layer of former back again Figure 4 10 Contrast before and after moving object one layer backward 85 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 2 3 Rotary Rotary command is a group command allowing designer to rotate one or more graph objects by any angle There are many rotatable graph objects such as line circle rectangle and graphs in the picture library of the system controls assembled graphs and polygons gt Free rotation Free rotation allows designers to rotate a chosen graph around any fixed point by 0 360 The steps are as follows l Choose one or more graph objects in the screen then click Free rotation command in Rotary G menu and choose Free rotation command in Rotary option in the right click menu option in Edit menu or click Free Rotation button 1 in the tool bar or call the right click At this moment a line with two small green dots at the two ends appears on the chosen object The smaller green dot is the center of rotation Move the mouse to this dot and then the mouse shape will become l Press down the left key of the mouse and move the rotation center to appropriate position and then release the left key G Move
25. and then click OK The default name of a new screen is the serial number of the screen and the default background color is blue See Figure 4 2 How Screen Comiquraton screen Sereen Wane Sereent Backer ound ROR SSUES SSSR SES S s tBackgroundColore w Aonechrome Hackground Color Ca a 80 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 4 2 New Screen dialog i Screen name cannot be led by space and numbers and cannot contain other special symbols 4 1 2 Modify screen properties To modify properties of a screen follow the steps below to have a Screen Properties dialog pop up In this dialog screen name and background color can be modified The steps are as follows If no object or control is chosen click a blank area in the current screen click ie command in the tool bar or click the screen to be modified in the Screen option in the Project Manager and right click it to call the right click menu and then click Properties option Besides you can also move the mouse to a blank space in the screen and right click the mouse to call the right click menu and choose Properties option in the menu After that a dialog as shown in Figure 4 3 will appear a NTT Screen Properties Sereen Hane ser een Racker ound Ce Monochrome a bog sa le r EA l Ea rr CO S Figure 4 3 Screen Properties dialog 4 1 3 Dele
26. fail return 1 Usage int GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID Example int bufferlen PortID PortID 0 bufferlen GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID 249 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 25 CLEARBUFFER This function is applied for free port communication only Description Clear buffer of communication port PortID allows to Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return 1 fail return O Usage int CLEARBUFFER PortID Example int Clearresult PortID PortID 0 Clearresult GETBUFFERLENGTH PortID 250 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 6 Off line Simulation 6 1 Call off line simulation Use SamDraw self contained function of off line simulation to verify the correctness of configuration screen before transmitting screen into HMI and connecting HMI with connection device e Operation process Save currently edited project and select the off line simulation command in download menu to pop up the window of off line simulation In this window you can use mouse to click other than touch screen to realize partial functions of touch screen as shown in figure 6 1 Samkoon SA 4 34 Off Line simulation process Figure 6 1 Diagram of SA 4 3A off line simulation In simulation window select the right key to pop up following menu Exit Q About A Exit close window of off line simulation when the current window of WINDOWS displays
27. properties See Figure 4 52 111 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bit Button General abeliij Advance Visibility aaa Border Color Fiz Color Bis Color Pattern Fume ti om Set OH O Set OFF Momentary O Invert trite Address Moni tor Figure 4 52 Bit Button dialog 2 This dialog has four property tabs that are General Label Advanced and Visibility Click the tab to enter the corresponding property setting page and then to set the properties gt General Shape Click Shape button Sere and then a Shape dialog will pop up in this dialog you can choose desired shape simply by clicking the shape See Figure 4 53 112 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 General Label Advanced Visibility TD BB0000 poart ooo Fume tion Set OF Set OFF Write Address ASO Moni ter Figure 4 53 Shape pop up dialog Border Color If you have chosen a shape with border you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system FG Color If you want to change the foreground color you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system foreground color is effective only when transition pattern is chosen Then there will be a contrast transition between the foreground color and the background color to make the control
28. used to move the chosen object to the top layer of the screen 53 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 i Corresponding to Move object backward command used to move the chosen object to the bottom layer of the screen E Corresponding to Move object one layer forward command used to move the chosen object one layer forward ra Corresponding to Move object one layer backward command used to move the chosen object one layer backward T Corresponding to Assemble command used to assemble several graph objects chosen to one combined object Et Corresponding to Disassemble command used to disassemble an assembled graph object to the original objects It is a reverse operation of Assemble ar Corresponding to Left align command used to align the left boundaries of the chosen objects on the left sl Corresponding to Right align command used to align the right boundaries of the chosen objects on the right or Corresponding to Top align command used to align the top boundaries of the chosen objects at the top a Corresponding to Bottom align command used to align the bottom boundaries of the chosen objects at the bottom we Corresponding to Horizontal centering command used to horizontally center the graph objects chosen OB Corresponding to Vertical centering command used to verticall
29. you can also cancel screen editing status and recover the mouse shape Drag The process of moving the mouse while pressing the left key 1s called Drag in this Manual It can be used to select several objects move objects or move pop up editing windows 2 8 2 Mouse shape When using SamDraw software the shape of the mouse may change with the operation to distinguish different operation types and provide convenience for users Table 2 1 below shows the allowable operations of different mouse shapes Enlarging object vertically Enlarging object horizontally Enlarging object both vertically and horizontally Readjusting Enlarging object both vertically and horizontally 62 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gi Rotating object Table 2 1 Different mouse shapes and corresponding meanings 2 8 3 Shortcut keys Table 2 2 below lists common shortcut keys Designers can use these keys to quicken the configuration Oooo eo ooo o Table 2 2 Shortcut keys 2 8 4 Common terms of SamDraw Table 2 3 below lists some frequently used terms in this Manual Shortened name of user application system Introduction of this concept is to make the complex computer technologies closer to common engineering Project users Files generated by SamDraw are called project files with an extension name of drw and can be saved to a directory specified by the User Gene
30. 0 255 read write Cddd Counter contact dddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 PLC model for configuration is consistent with connected device or not 5 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 332 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 333 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 9 Connection between SIEMENS S7 200 series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC register of SIEMENS S7 200 series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of SIEMENS S7 200 series through the serial devi
31. 1 Ifthe data types involved in operation are different first convert them into one type then make operation 2 Conversion is made as the data length so as to ensure the high precision For example when int and long is in operation convert int into long then make operation 3 All float operations are double Even the expression contains float only it must be converted to double for operation 4 Char and short must be converted into int for operation 5 In the assignment operation when the data types on both sides of assignment sign are different the right data type will be converted to the left type If the right data is longer than left one it will loss a part of data In this case the precision will be reduces The lost data will be rounded off Forced type conversion The forced type conversion is achieved by type conversion operation Its general form is type specifier expression It is used to convert the operation results into the specified type of type specifier by force Take an example of float a convert a to float int x y convert the result of x y into integer In forced conversion there are some points to be noted 1 Type specifier and expression must be included in the bracket the single variable may not be bracketed If ant xt y is written to be int x y it means to convert x into int and plus y 2 Either forced conversion or auto conversion is just the temporary conversion of data length
32. 13 Create Macro ADDSUM 5 4 2 Control property setting Step 6 lt compile control gt lt 1 gt Put the corresponding control in the project menu and adjust the size as Figure 5 14 234 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Numerical entry ics Hittin Figure 5 14 Control Layout lt 2 gt Set the corresponding control property Right click the control of numeral entry display and set the write in address of control property as shown in Figure 5 15 235 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bit Hutton General Label Advanced Yisibility em eer m ol aue a e m moo Border Color Fiz Color Bi Color Pattern Function Set OH O Set OFF C Moment ary C Invert Write Address i Monitor Macro F Use Macro Figure 5 15 Numeral entry Display Property Setting Keep the consistency of LW0 LW1 LW2 LW3 SumLW variable address and the corresponding control write address Figure 5 13 bit LW0 LW1 LW2 LW3 LW4 respectively Click OK button to save the setting lt 3 gt Set bit button control property as figure Select bit button control right click it and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 16 Bit Button Make settings as the circled prompt Click
33. 2 28 Sereen Setting I Fit Button Word Button Screen Button Function Button i Bit Lamp Multastate Lamp Humeriec Display Humeric Entry ASCIT Character Display ASCII Character Entry Bar Graph Time Display Date Display Day of week Display Static Picture Picture Display GLIE Display Trend Chart Alirend Chart Iynamic Circle Dynamic Rectangle Alarm Control Tynamic Alarm Bar Histrorie Alarm Dialog Graphics Move Ne ter Multistate Switeh Histroric Record Display Message Display Multi function Button Flow Block E1 z E n a xy Ld 3 ES Ea e gi Lx fs Pan a o a g sy Eh r Figure 2 28 Object menu 45 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bit button Used to set in the current screen a touch key for bit operation of the connected device including bit setting resetting inching and alternation Word button Used to set in the current screen a touch key for word operation of the connected device including constant setting value inputting password inputting adding and subtracting Screen button Used to set screen switch in the current screen including opening a screen opening the previous screen closing and opening a screen and closing a screen Function button Used to set in the current screen a touch key that realizes certain function of the operating system including closing back light confirming alarm restartin
34. 262 144 pigments Service life of back light 60 000 hours 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate 5 wire high precision touch plate E o USB RS232 RS422 RS485 USB RS232 RS422 RS485 interface Ambient temperature for 10 to 65 C 10 to 65 C running running 18 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 7 Main technical parameters Model SA 7A SA 7B Display size 7 length width 16 9 Resolution 800x480 Brightness 450cd m Color 262 144 pigments Contrast 450 1 Service life of back light 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate Communication interface USB RS232 RS422 RS485 User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 Power consumption CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 1 000V AC 1 minute Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature for running 10 to 65 C Ambient humidity for running 10 to 90 RH non condensable Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 216x150x40 5 mm 202 lt 144x40 mm Opening dimension 210x144 mm 192x138 mm Weight About 1 5kg Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 O Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 8 Main technical parameters Model SA 8 Display size 8 length width
35. 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon J32 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 15 Connection between HAIWELL S H series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from HAIWELL S H series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of HAIWELL S H series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC includes S and H series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port Haiwell PLC programming port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect with PLC programming port Samkoon touch screen COM1 or
36. BS Coder Text Color Peete W Time Display i Data Display Mecsas Figure 7 23 Dialog box of alarm controls 7 8 Recipe Configuration The recipe of SamDraw is introduced in details in this section In manufacturing field recipe describes the proportional relation of different ingredients used for production of some product which is a set of parameter setting values corresponding to some variables during manufacturing For example the bakehouse has a basic ingredient recipe for bread production which lists all compositions used during bread production e g water flour sugar egg and sesame oil etc and all optional ingredients e g fruit nutlet and chocolate chips etc All of these optional ingredients can be added to basic recipe to produce various kinds of bread For another example in steel plant a recipe may be a set of machine parameter setting For batch processing device one recipe may be used to describe different steps during batch processing One device can be used to produce bread and also cake The bread includes sweet one and salty one Cake has cream one and chocolate one Here the proportional relation of ingredients for bread manufacturing is called recipe and the proportional relation of ingredients for production of salty or sweet bread called one file It is clear that the recipe record is included in recipe file The function of recipe configuration is provided in SamDraw You can enter the dial
37. Backward Screen Open Screen Property Information Output Window Project Manager Find Address and Address Table Grey commands are invalid under the current environment and can be used only when the object to be edited is chosen Some commands in Edit menu are group commands which are marked with a small triangle on the right side of the line In addition each command has a shortcut key This menu is a drop down menu as shown in Figure 2 27 Undo Used to cancel the last operation The shortcut key 1s Ctrl Z Redo Used to recover the last operation The shortcut key is Ctrl Shift Z Cut used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl X Copy Used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl C Duplicate Used to copy several graphs chosen in horizontal and vertical directions increasing the address by 0 255 units The shortcut key is Ctrl D Paste Used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen The shortcut key is Ctrl FN Delete Used to delete a chosen object The shortcut key is Ctrl Del 41 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 hee View Draw T Object Screen F Paste PF Ctrlty Select All OA Ctrlta Align Layer d Rotary d Assemble Mirror Loom Fan View Grid Grid Width Border Scale The Forward Screen The Backward Sereen Open Screen Property
38. Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 6 Alarm control Alarm Control can display current alarm information of the equipment digital alarm and analog alarm Before using this control you must configure alarm settings Refer to Alarm Setting for configuration of alarm settings Alarm Control can store real time alarm information and the number of alarms to be displayed is defined during configuration SamDraw supports digital alarm information The steps to insert Alarm Control are as follows Click Alarm Control command in Tool menu or click Alarm Control button 2 in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 95 will appear 171 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alare Display i i s General Vi sibility Font Size Tazt Color Border Color Pe aed Rows Grid Title bar a Font Size Vertical 7 Horizontal Font Color a Ber Color Test Colar wi Tine Display E Data Display Message Figure 4 95 Alarm Display dialog In this dialog you can set color and size of the display box pattern and color of grid and time font and color of title You can also set alarm text size color and row number in alarm list box If the Rows are set to 5 the control can display 5 rows of alarm information at the same time When there is a new alarm the previous alarm will be replaced After setting these parameters press dow
39. Collector in popped up menu to create a new historical data collector notice only one historical data collector can be newly created at most Otherwise the error prompt box will be popped up Double click Historical Data Collector 0 in Project Manager to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 7 13 Histarical Data Collector General lata Item Hamme Historical Data Collector Heniry Sanple Full Processing Sample Length j Etop Sampling Funber of Sanpling L Memory Required zz lEz eee F Fall Limit 90 Z g Kenmarks Aenory Required 20tThe total bytes of datatype ofanber of Sampling Read Address Sampling Method Tined Interval 1 pi Second s Fom LJ Triggered C Clocked Figure 7 13 Dialog box of historical data collector e Name user can change the name displayed in project manager as required Sample length number of data read from memory each time Number of sampling times of data extraction Read address read initial address of data be introduced in details in page Data Item 212 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 e Sampling method J Timed start to read data with time interval set by user Triggered start to read data when the trigger address value is 1 V Clocked start to read data with time interval set by user Sample full processing V Stop sampling if this option is selected when the sampl
40. E E E OT e O TAE a NEETA 80 LEZ Modi y Sereen Proper ES nopee r a E woqesenseaatennes 81 AWS IDCICTE SOIC CIs asatiaweie tear awe ei ei a a a 81 wA WOODY SCLC CI sh decrees tise dnc tatatannshattlunddaase E O E 82 4 2 Graph editing commands of SaMDraw cccssseesesssseseccceeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaassseeseeeeeeseeeess 82 ADM AssembecanddisassemblG sania A O A E A 82 ED NAV T aa a a a a a a a a a alec eR a ao eR a 84 Pe RO a T ee Re TC a eR Te Ce ee 86 ADA SANT E E Se eset Site nt Sires Sete sic ate Rice oem eRe eee neal 89 4 3 Drawite basic graphs Usmo SamDraW sso haciin inen n a a a e ran a araia 93 Mk Ea T E el Sa la a eae 94 A32 od 8 2X 6 0210 1 0 lt a nO eC ORO ee mee eT en 96 7 FS FS aS LEG A nee eee ee Te ee Cee nee cee ee nee ee ARE E EE Tey eee ere ERS 96 AAs TNT SUMS ssa tse ae lsat Soleo Sol tao Saran are panda oan are pend canna 98 ASD a iraleht Comme eC iO Hie shes goles ast acleghies a asec pasadena eae ea esa disuatealee de 98 ADO CURVESCONMCEHI OMI Ness oea eE e E R e E a e a 100 Lad RENE Onean eA RET AUA A E EE TAE 101 ASS MEDSE CITE Osr a a a aaa neaeataneeeiaeseds 102 Ao PONSON aoa a A E eee E A E 104 ALO POX Cr ADS ee a a A tua luhecnstaeeleieime 105 Ao Mable Chap Makr A E uiadaneeenadeetenoduseuanadeietetadaatnnadeetasegdaueet 106 AS Seale orap iae TTC SE a E 108 i els es 0 18 Ora y eg L L a N ee eee 109 AD A Bond Bayo scribe seis Paden a eile david anderiiae ond asd eed
41. Find Address Address Table Reverse Select Find Macro Macro Manager Figure 2 26 Edit menu Select All Used to select all the objects in the current screen of the current project The shortcut key is Ctrl A Align Used to align two or more objects chosen The align manners include top alignment bottom alignment vertical centering left alignment right alignment and horizontal centering Layer Used to place the object chosen to different screen layer The selectable layers include top layer one upper layer bottom layer and one lower layer Rotary Used to rotate the chosen object The rotary manners include free rotation horizontal rotation and vertical rotation Assemble Used to assemble two or more objects chosen to a control or to disassemble an assembled object to the original objects 42 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 When using Assemble key do not assemble objects to be touched or it cannot be touched after downloading to the touch screen Users may use Layer command to superpose touch objects Mirror Used to overturn a chosen object The allowable overturning manners include horizontal overturning and vertical overturning Zoom Used to zoom in or out the current screen in order to conduct finer control operation The available zoom options include 1x zoom in recover and 1x zoom out Pan view Used to move the current screen up and down
42. Macro Button 5 3 2 Function button introduction in macro editor The functional controls are arranged in macro editor window as shown in Figure 5 3 Macro Editor 222 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Earra Roatonr Compiles szuscaecs Herer pinn ee ne 2 i Figure 5 3 Macro Editor lt 1 gt Button function description 1 New add new create a macro 2 Delete delete the selected macro 3 Edit edit the selected macro same with double click macro 4 Copy select one macro and click copy to copy the selected macro 5 Paste paste the copied contents and the suffix of macro name adds one automatically 6 Description pop up the macro description 7 Close close or exit the current dialog box lt 2 gt Compile success window for recording all macro names with successful compilation in project as shown in 10 3 Select one and double click to enter into macro edition lt 3 gt Unfinished compile window for recording all unfinished compile macro name in project as shown in 10 3 Select one and double click to enter into macro edition 5 3 3 How to new create macro Click new add button and pop up the dialog box of macro compiler as shown in Figure 5 4 Macro Compiler 223 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bacro Compiler ID p Hacro Hame oR Ax War tinclude Macrolnit hh void Mac
43. OF Sai Draw ct ccekue elt eet A ewe alh eel OS ie we lt nie ol oe 61 2 8 Basic Operations Ol Samra Wrest sles Cader taeda cd vai a ee aloe des 61 2 82 MOUSE OPCl aU ON sssr en a setae E e mes E a E EE E E aE 6l De NOS eD aaa a eae a E E eaten cote oustenscdaees 62 2S HOM CUMKEY S orraa N A E O soabiewicanbiesaanaeeae 63 DSA COMMON Erns OLS ATA N e 63 3 Basic stepson creating 42 project with SamDra Wosa a EA a E E E E 65 3 1 Creatine anew project with Sama Wore cots inea a a a a a a 65 nkl Newpoeer dialo marian aTa TA TN A ATAA L 65 3 1 2 Communication port setting dialog ccccccsssssseeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeees 67 SLES SSCTCCMPSCHINO CIAO T a a T RET ERE E EEEREN 68 3 2 Setting parameters and adding graph Objects ccccccccssssseeesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 69 Sl Semme Parameters tant a a a A hae aa 69 322 Addie a Crap h ODOC ean cchea whe seseence A R hacen cu tees cudaseanceaxiodees 71 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 3 3 Downloading SamDraw configuration Project cccccccccccccccsssssssssseeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeaaseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 12 3 4 Uploading of SamDraw configuration projec iseseisana a e S e 76 3 5 AW COMIN CU S asc see A S A N E A ENAA A one nerds AE A E N A TI 4 lt quide on Conmouralon With Sa DTA W a E N N N 80 4 1 Sal Draw screen Operations a eae debswiasbuntieus bl aaa a a e aa a aeia a 80 Al NEWS O eenen e
44. OK to save the settings 236 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bit Button Gener al Label R happenin Visibility ID BBOOOO Border Color Fiz Color Bis Color Pattern Function Set OH O Set FF O Momentary Inver t trite Address Moni tor Figure 5 16 Bit Button lt 4 gt Timer property setting Select the timer and right click it and pop up the dialog box of timer property as Figure 5 17 Select the macro name Init and click OK to save the settings 237 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Properties Run Condition Always perforn v Frequency 10 x100ms Function Function Type Figure 5 17 Timer Property Setting lt 5 gt Select label gt text in the function button and input character in the text box as Figure 5 18 238 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Function Button Font System bal Font Sire EER ES SS SS mm ford Interval Font UnderLine Figure 5 18 Function Button Property Setting Step 7 lt Compile general project and download to touch screen gt Complete the above setting and save the project for next compilation Then download the project to touch screen through USB lt 1 gt Click V in the red circle as Figure 5 19 and execute the project compilatio
45. ON Status Set OFF Status Table and Scale This menu can be also used to open and close tool box A on the left of the command indicates the tool box has been displayed in the screen Using picture elements built with the Tool menu designers can conveniently change the color text size and position of these elements See Figure 2 27 43 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 iteteeee Object Screen F Line IL Polyline BH Curve f Are CA Free Line Straight Cable Curve Cable Rectangle R Ellipse E Polyzon I Text CT Open Library 0 Build Library IC Sah roe oOyre OY ev Set OW Status 1 Set OFF Status 0 4 Table Scale om i L Figure 2 27 Draw menu Line Used to draw a straight line of any direction in the current screen Polyline Used to draw a polygonal line of any direction in the current screen Curve Arc Used to draw a line in the current screen first and then adjust the radian after canceling drawing by right click Free line Used to draw a line of any direction in the current screen along the movement of the mouse Straight connection line Used to draw a 90 polygonal line between two points in the current screen Curve connection line Used to draw a curve with changing radian between two points in the current screen Rectangular Used to draw a rectangular of any size in the current screen Ellipse Used to draw an ellipse of any
46. PSGSN Enea tae SERN SERDIRRERI OD Figure 2 21 Driver installation After installation connect the touch screen with PC using USB cable We can find a serial driver named Samkoon HMI Tech Corp under General serial bus controller of the device manager See Figure 2 22 ATE e eee Intel R 8280168 USB Universal Host Controller 27 8 Intel R 8280168 USB Universal Host Controller 27 9 IntelR 8280168 USE Universal Host Controller 27CA inmtel R 8280168 USS Universal Host Controller 27C8 Intel R 8260168 USBI Enhanced Host Controller 27CC USE Root Hud USB Root Hub USS Root Hub USS Root Hub USB Root Hub Figure 2 22 Driver name So far the touch screen has been connected properly with the computer 38 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 R After connection of Samkoon SA series touch screen with a computer do install USB driver strictly following the above steps or you may fail in downloading the project configuration 2 7 Editing page and system composition of SamDraw 2 7 1 Editing page of SamDraw SamDraw configuration software is the configuration visual development system of Samkoon SA series touch screens produced by Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd As an integrated development environment software it has abundant and powerful development functions SamDraw adopts the advantages of Windows system with high use
47. Sane 15 P2525 Power suppi INOCUIC cscs dented ace dentate nian Carleen denis ede Caleta at ae 16 1 6 VUES CEPI VAT OMEN CI essreasstiasisiySecoeastoesse ajax E E eiotiasie tian an as E A 16 1 7 Taon apa O ea Mane ONES ACU a OMIT ANS NDE ROUSE INS a ACA NOT NE ST SEO OEE ORE RN 16 1 8 NV WUD oie Sade ble ee Reet ont E leh ie Dh Slt A Slee let et a ac ela ek Slee es hie hae O ed ened 24 Ds QUICK SCA OF SAMA W esi N E A a a 25 2 1 Wa pS Sal PAW eere e siad nase saad are E adnan iad eae 25 22 Requirements of SamDraw for COMPUtET ccccccesccccccccceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeaasasasseseeeeeeeeess 26 2 2 1 Software requirements of SamDraw for computerf nooss00eeoooeeeeeneennssssssssssssserrreeeessssssssssses 26 2 2 2 Hardware requirements of SamDraw for COMPUCET ce ceeesesseseseeeceeceeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeess 26 2 3 Installation of SamDraw configuration SOftWALEC ccccecsesssecccccceeceeeeeeasseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeees 27 2 4 Uninstall SamDraw configuration SOftWALEC cccccccecccccceeceeeeeecaassseseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaassseeeseeeeeeeeeess 31 29 Operaiomo r Sanr a Waie eaa i E A E ieee 33 2 6 Mis Cala COO USB OVOCE esse esc Seats ae R 34 2 Editing page and system composition Of SamDraw ccccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeaeeeesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaaaaeeeesees 39 274 JEdiine Pace Or Samra scare e iaotie dace ao esas toh cient onde toed 39 Zila SYSIEM COMPOSITION
48. Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 LW7 X axis value of pen 3 LW8 Y axis value of pen 3 LW9 X axis value of pen 4 LW 10 Y axis value of pen 4 The read addresses are LW3 to LW10 totally 8 addresses Thus if 16 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of 2 N addresses can be read continuously according to different address rules of the PLC If the data type is 32 digit data the number of data is 3 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 12 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 X axis value of pen 1 LWS5S Y axis value of pen 1 LW7 X axis value of pen 2 LW9 Y axis value of pen 2 LW11 X axis value of pen 3 LW13 Y axis value of pen 3 The read addresses are LW3 to LW14 totally 12 addresses Thus if 32 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of 2 N addresses adding 2 to the address each time can be read according to different address rules of the PLC 4 5 4 Dynamic circle Dynamic Circle 1s used to place a graph onto the screen and have the graph move along a specified course and change in size Such movement and size change is determined by the value of the monitored address The steps to insert Dynamic Circle control and modify its properties are as follows Click Dynamic Circle icon ox in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 93 will appear 166 Shenzhen Samkoon s S
49. So m Objective Beeipe Humber mr z mi Copy Recipe Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 a 0 Le Ga Gal Sco ccoco coo aio ojo oe i fa ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee a Figure 7 26 Function of recipe data copy This recipe includes 4 sub recipes in all Each recipe has 16 members The store address is memory addresses RWI 1 RWI 16 of HMI 2 After completion of recipe configuration display recipe on screen and carry out alteration or directly download recipe to PLC Therefore the following several important function controls will be used VY Recipe display click value display input E For operations please refer to Value Display Input Select address of internal memory area to be RWI 0 You can create controls of value display and input on screen Value of input and display is just recipe number If value of RWIO is 0 it means that the recipe number is 1 if value is 1 the recipe number is 2 and so forth Fl JV Click function button E for operations please refer to Function Button Through related function setting in function button buttons as Write Recipe to PLC Read Recipe from PLC Save Recipe Previous Recipe and Next Recipe can be established on screen 3 The screen shown in figure 7 27 can be finished as per above mentioned operations If all addresses written into monitoring are DO recipe length is 16 and total number is 4 286 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Conf
50. TFI parameter sething Wl Stetus fe FIs Cerdval Jia Class i File frolic a i FI Trebuctsua eee OCD 3eresal m Tirim distavieal Date Leceer f Mare lez Jegilal Alarm leg Po balg AL Lig AA acip 4 daca Transact Tas tinates lefi Figure 2 15 Software running page 2 6 Installation of USB driver Before downloading configuration files to the touch screen you must install USB driver of the touch screen or the PC will not identify the touch screen after connection and thus configuration projects cannot be downloaded Appropriate installation method should be chosen according to the version of Windows 1 The steps of installation under Windows XP 2000 and 98 are as follows Start up Windows Place the installation CD into the CD drive Double click USBDriver file to start installation See Figure 2 16 34 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 USBDriver InstallShield Wizard j x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for USBD river The InstalS hield enlant vaf Tm USBOrver on your computer To continue cick N Figure 2 16 Install the USB driver After the installation has completed you can connect the touch screen with the PC via USB Installation under Windows VISTA Manual installation in required under Windows VISTA Start up Windows Connect the USB cable of the touch screen to the PC and then a page as shown in Figure 2 17 will appear
51. User Manual V3 3 e The following is the operation step for off line simulation v Users without installation of SamDraw3 3 install the software firstly v Double click the shortcut icon SamDraw3 3 exe on desktop J Select the icon for new item or File New Project in menu bar to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 6 3 Hew Project Project Properties Froject Hame test Fath cy Model Sa 10 4A 00 600 10 4 SA 12 14 00600 17 17 Show Model SA 10 44 800e600 10 4 SA 10 4B 40450 10 4 SA 10 24 8004 480 10 2 SABA H4040 6 0 J SA GB A006000 5 0 e a SA TA B B00 480 7 0 Resolution SA 5 TAD 40x460 5 7 J SA S TEE 6404480 5 77 Color Sa 5 TCF 3208234 5 7 3 User Memory SAO SA 4504e2T2 4 3 J SA 3 SAGZ0e240 3 5 Model Parameters Power Supply COMI Ro2o2 RS4e2 PRSA8S COM RS232 RS4ee R5485 USE l Forts B type Max Screen Number 50 Figure 6 3 Dialing box of new project vV Enter project name in column Project Name select one saving position for the project in column Position select SA 4 3A 480 272 4 3 in column Model Selection The 4 3 inch HMI is just taken for example Users can select other models as required select Horizontal in column Display Mode Users can select vertical display as required After finishing the setting information just set by users will display in the below module Model Parameter Users can click
52. a a _ tHE Ss 0 iG He Be Be 0 gt gt Ene 0 SRF i E cn TABELE a Figure 3 4 Color selection dialog Then click OK and then the system will immediately open the screen you created just now After that the new screen creation is completed and you can use SamDraw to configure your project screens al Screen name cannot be led by space and numbers and cannot contain other special symbols 3 2 Setting parameters and adding graph objects 3 2 1 Setting parameters In the Setting menu you can choose to modify the settings and you can also modify parameters by double clicking touch screen parameter setting in the Project Manager The dialog as shown in Figure 3 5 will pop up 69 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samgkoon General Se ae ee ee HWE Farenetier Setting Fotel Weer Levral Pasovord Satting WI Wedel Fek 10 dA 60060 10 Levell ilii aor Level ooo Display Tepe Hori zontal LavelS oth Leveld ther Spl sch Sereenl Bevel T _ i Leyel o gt LT nnana LevelT Flicker Frequency 10 s xD is Deraan Savar Tine J ic Ra Level asse laim Folre Ho Vaice Pr opis i Default User Level v Towch Yoies Have voice Fronp T lSeraunsavers Screen Tha highest authority password mg Lead Seren ra fhether the upload to need the oasercrd j Cane l Help Figure 3 5 General setti
53. a aa wil aie deemed 110 4 4 Basic COMMONS OL SaM DIAN ae eaa E L E R E E EE E EEN 111 kerk IBICCOKO a a neloar Sebunclontr oa netsanes obuialoat on talon obialoabi on kam bubuch eens 111 eA Word DUO sss tantra a ee ae ee ee ee 120 AAS Deren DUNO 4 eae R me eT ee Ne aT E Ter ety ee ee Te ety Nee etre ty Nee en rer ny er er re rer ee 122 TAA Ponchon DUNO saat anaaunetts saat nenaaemeais saw N as PS WES AC VAIN aa a ste thc beers tanta ttensthda hon cn Soa tsanteatelctentsanteon tants 130 AAG Mattistate lanp an tala ako A N L data ea kteha Mondale E REE 132 AAT MOSTI S WITE eien e e a a e a a occa 136 AAS NUME dipla yann E E AE E A A EEE REE 137 gt ANE E EN y aea a S a gu aaeeauaniuartcentarettes 142 AA LO ASCMebaracterdis playonan aoe A a ee eee ae 145 AE AS CCA GAG ter Cnty sc tess a ccimedt ecole ctu aces a a a 146 ND Ba OR ahold teat a testten a se aloe A dette ao isan ate eas cea eee aden E AA E 148 PAS EEAS LAY aiuto ats Societe sa hentia sheath E f stat bts Con bales eatel A at gnisbat bade A 151 AA UE MACS IS VAY excels Sara E E AE E E ete Nc eat ea ee alm eat Sel a aaa Shae AET 153 AAAS Day OL Wee CIS PAY gsi es cere tts itech teal saa A ad a acd dae ctu bueed aaa etenaeandtede 154 MANGO Slat C PICU ci T E E A E I E E E E A IEE E E E T 155 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 APN Piere displayen E E E EE 156 4 5 Advanced controls of SamDraw cccccccccccccccceeceeeeeaseseee
54. and higher than that of assignment operator In the six relational operators lt lt gt gt has the same priority which is higher than and While and has the same priority Relational expression The general form of relational expression is Expression Relational operator Expression For example atb gt c d x gt 3 2 a 1 lt c 1 5 j k 1 are legal relational expression As the expression is relational expression concurrently the nestification may occur such as a gt b gt c a c d etc The value of relational expression is true and false which is expressed with 1 and 0 1 Logical operator and expression In C language the logical operators include AND operator amp amp OR operator and NOT operator AND operator amp amp and OR operator are binary operators with left associativity NOT operator is unary operator with right associativity The priority relation between logical operator and other operators can be expressed as following The following can be derived depending on the priority of operator a gt b amp amp c gt d is equivalent to a gt b amp amp c gt d b c d lt a is equivalent to b c d lt a atb gt c amp amp xt y lt b is equivalent to at b gt c amp amp x y lt b Evaluation of logical operation The evaluation of logical operation may be true or false expressed with 1 and 0 individually Its evaluation rules are as following 1 When the two values o
55. are false it will execute statement n Then continue to execute the subsequent program There are some points to be noted in if statement 1 In the three forms of 1f statement the one behind if is expression This expression is usually the logical expression or relational expression But it may be other expressions such as assignment expression even a variable For example if a 5 statement and if b statement are allowable As long as the expression value is not 0 it is true If the expression value in if a 5 expression is always not 0 the subsequent statement will be executed This kind of situation may not take place in the program but the syntax is legal Another example program segment 1f a b printf od a else printf a 0 Semanteme of the statement assign b to a if it is not 0 this value is output otherwise it outputs a 0 character string This kind of application usually occurs in the program 213 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Inif statement the conditional judgment expression must be included in bracket and ended with semicolon 3 In the three forms of if statement all statements should be single statement If a group several statements are required execution with conditions this group of statements must be bracketed with to form a compound statement Pay attention that no semicolon is allowed behind For example if a gt b a
56. as the information attached to the manual PLC supported by Samkoon series touch screens MITSUBISHI FX A series Programming interface protocol SIEMENS S7 200 series PPI protocol Unitelway Modbus protocol MATSUSHITA MELTOCOL protocol SCHNEIDER MODICON NEZA NANO TWIDO FUJI Programming interface protocol EMERSON EC series programming interface Modbus RTU Communication protocol of DELTA DVP series DELTA PLC Communication protocol of VIGOR VH VB M VIGOR PLC ROCKWELL MICROLOGIX SLC series DF 1 protocol MASTER K series MASTER K FACON MA MC series Communication protocol of 302 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 es a C C roms e seme A 303 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 1 Pin definition of communication port of touch screen ji D 8 D y lo DDO O e RX 232 communication receiving end e TX 232 communication transmitting end e KZ control end e GND ground e R 422 receive e R 422 receivet e T 422 transmit 485T e T 422 transmit 485T KPI use 2 3 5 terminal in 232 communication use 6 7 8 9 terminal in 422 communication use 8 9 terminal in 485 communication 304 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 2 Connection between MATSUSHITA FP series PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data o
57. checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the Multi state switch is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list amp Pay attention when selecting Write Address For example when writing ASCII characters to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and the subsequent continuous addresses The length of the occupied addresses is determined by the total character number If the total character number is 12 then the address from V10 to V21 will be occupied If you try using other controls to monitor the value of the occupied address there may be errors Thus pay attention to ASCII character display to avoid mis operation over data and address 147 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gi Other options in General tab of this control are the same as those in ASCII Character Display l Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Advanced and Visibility tabs gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become N Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 12 Bar graph The main function of Bar Graph control is to present the real time change in the data in the form of bars so that you can see the change clearly and easi
58. choose the option of The Same Monitor Address and Write Address so that the state value written by you can be directly presented or displayed 115 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the bit button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list gi When Monitor option is not checked the ON OFF state of the bit button will not change even if it is touched gt Label When Label tab is clicked the Off Text page will be displayed by default See Figure 4 56 Bit Button 1 General Label Advanced Visibility Off Text On Text Off Picture On Picture _ Picture Source Systems Library File Selete Picture V Fit to Object Border Interval I Fosition oO O O Figure 4 56 Label tab of Bit Button This tab consists of four pages that are Off Text On Text Off Picture and On Picture Off Text and On Text Used to change the text at Off state or On state font pattern font size edge distance font color position and some other properties SamDraw also provides more convenient copy function so that you can directly copy well set properties to the current Off Text or On Text 116 Shenzhen Samkoon s Sa
59. communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 328 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 8 Connection between MITSUBISHI FX A series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the PLC devices without communication protocol of MITSUBISHI FX A series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the communication unit programming port of PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the structure application The supported FX A series PLC includes FXON FXIN FX1S FX2N and FX3U When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port EITSUBISHI FX series PLC WSDAP I Samkoon SA series touch screen J Connect with programming port The 9 pin serial port DB9 8 hole is adopted Female connector is connected to Samkoon
60. configuration display 4022 Display level 7 password designated at the time Level 7 password 4023 of configuration display 4024 Display level 8 password designated at the time Level 8 password 4025 of configuration display Display screen saver time at the time of 4026 Screen saver time configuration display 4027 Flicker period of indicator Flick period of indicator light controls with light minimum value 0 2 and unit s Position of X coordinate at 4028 Position of X coordinate at the time of touching the time of touching Position of Y coordinate at 4029 Position of Y coordinate at the time of touching the time of touching Communication parameter manufacturer PLC 4037 PLC trademark of COMI trademark 292 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 a 4046 PLC model of COM2 Communication parameter model CPU model Number of current historical 4047 Alarm controls use alarms Number of current historical 4048 Alarm controls use records l touch with sound 2 touch without sound 8 3 RWI RWIO Recipe number register Display recipe designated by recipe number The corresponding recipe data can be displayed Recipe memory address l l in RWI when designating recipe number 293 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 9 Connection Mode of One Device with Multiple Screens and One Screen with Multiple D
61. current screen to the original standard size a Corresponding to Zoom out command used to zoom out the current screen by 1x For further zoom out click this button again g the configuration window Choose this command first move the mouse to the picture area press Corresponding to Translate command used to move the screen in the allowable range of down the left key of the mouse and keep such state then move the mouse to desired position and loosen the key Corresponding to Line command used to draw a straight line of any direction in the current screen n current screen Corresponding to Polyline command used to draw a polygonal line of any direction in the 55 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 H Corresponding to Curve Arc command used to draw a curve or arc in the current screen K Corresponding to Free line command used to draw a line of any direction in the current screen along the movement of the mouse he Corresponding to Straight connection line command used to draw connection lines in the screen a o Corresponding to Curve connection line command used to draw connection curves in the screen Corresponding to Rectangle command used to draw a rectangle of any size in the current screen Corresponding to Rounded rectangle command used to draw a rounded
62. equipment O LED is off LED ison X LED is flashing Table 1 1 1 5 Principle of the touch screen Samkoon SA series touch screen uses powerful 32 digit RISC microprocessor with low power consumption low temperature rise low failure rate and aging of the machine and high reliability of 14 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 the system It also includes internal memory external system program memory power circuit module communication module display and touch module and so on Figure 1 11 1s a schematic diagram for the structure of the touch screen I f Communication module Status indicator light Figure 1 11 Schematic diagram for the structure of SA series touch screen 1 5 1 CPU module 32 digit RISC microprocessor is used with higher computation rate lower power consumption and stable operation 1 5 2 Touch screen display module SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A use 4 wire electric resistance type touch screen plate and SA 12 1A SA 10 4A SA 10 4B SA 10 2SA SA 8A SA 8B SA 7A SA 7B SA 5 7A SA 5 7B SA 5 7C SA 5 7D SA 5 7E and SA 5 7F use 5 wire electric resistance type touch screen plate with high touch precision high durability and long service life The display screen brings TFT LCD 260 000 pigment true color display 1 5 3 Communication module This module is designed with high resistance against interference high voltage and lightning It has enhanced comm
63. exit simulation automatically after 30 minutes of program running At present plc model supported by on line simulation includes MITSUBISHI all series EMERSON all series OMRON all series SIEMENS S7 200 PPI MATSUSHITA series LG all series Fatek series Haitwell all series THINGET all series Techwayson series and Modbus RTU Mater Usually the cable used by plc for on line simulation is download line 1 e cable connected with plc programming software other than communication cable for plc connected with touch screen Please contact us for technical support as soon as possible if communication is blocked In on line simulation the function button can only be used to perform following functions previous recipe next recipe current recipe save alter user level log off user level and touch voice ON OFF Options Dialog Box of Historical Alarm Historical Data Displayer Diagram of Historical Trend Timer and Macro in toolbar cannot be simulated 259 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 7 System Setting 7 1 Setting of Communication Screen The setting of communication screen means to set the communication parameter of touch screen and connecting device SA 10 4A SA 10 4B SA 8A SA 7A SA 5 7A SA 5 7B and SA 5 7C have COM1 and COM2 two ports and can communicate with two different PLC at the same time The parameter of each communication screen has to
64. more beautiful BG Color If you want to change the background color you can click this button and then choose a desired color in the drop down color selection system Pattern Click this drop down box and then you can select any of the 21 patterns to beautify the control See Figure 4 54 for an example 113 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 hat Dutton fx General Label Advanced Visibility o ooo In BEODOG Shape Border Color i OFF FG Color 1 BG Color i Pattern Solid ay Horizontal Set OF Set OFF C Momentary T Vertical eq Right Slash IEH Left Slash Funct om Write Address MSO HH Box RR Slope Pox Moni tor OB Hab Spoke J Horizontal Tra I Horizontal Symn H Vertical Transi Macro aa Fertical Symmnet Ranp On The Tr Pad Skew Symmetric i Ramp Under The ET Skew symmetric SW Upper left corr LEIN Lower left Corr H4P i mk n Bl ka PL Figure 4 54 Color options Function Set ON If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address to 1 by clicking this bit button that is setting the write address of the connected device to ON state and displaying 1 ON state Set OFF If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address to 0 by clicking this bit button that is setting the write address of the connected dev
65. mouse to a position where a line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the polygonal line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Move the mouse to a position where you want to change the direction of the line left click the mouse once and then a small green rectangle will appear At this moment the line from the first end to this green rectangle will not move along with the mouse Then move the mouse to another position where you want to change the direction of the line and left click again When a desired polygonal line has been drawn right click the mouse to complete See Figure 4 28 Figure 4 28 Drawing a polygonal line gt After completing the above steps the polygonal line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the polygonal line and double click or click rh Properties button in the tool bar after choosing the polygonal line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the polygonal line using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for polygonal li
66. not support data downloading and printing 4 5 12 Message display Functions of Message Display are similar to the functions of Multi state Lamp except that Message Display control has more total states up to 128 states The icon of this control in the tool bar is Click this button and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 103 will appear 181 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bessage Display G eneral Text _ I i a Fis Color Bir Color a Data Type 1B Bit Unsigned Int i Monitor Address Total States Figure 4 103 Message Display dialog R I Refer to Multi state Lamp control for parameter setting of Message Display 4 5 13 Flow block Flow Block is used to simulate in animated pictures the fluid flow status in pipeline Whether a flow block is flowing is determined by the state of the trigger bit when the trigger bit is 1 the flow block is flowing when the trigger bit is 0 the flow block is static The flowing speed is specified by user Create a new Flow Block or double click an existing Flow Block to enter the property dialog as
67. of Chinese and the style of Windows Many functions used in configuration can be found here Commands in right click menu include Properties Insert Library Cut Copy Duplicate Paste Delete Select All Align Layer Rotary Assemble Image Ratio Grid Grid Width Simulation Status and Screen See Figure 2 35 50 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Froperties F Insert d Library d Cut T Ctrlth Copy E Ctrl C Duplicate M Ctri ti Faste F CtrltY Delete D Del Selete AL A Ctrlta A Align d Layer F Rotary d Assemble b Image Ratin d wird Gird Width d Simulation Status Srn b Figure 2 35 Right click menu Properties Used to open property window of object if an object is chosen or screen if no object is chosen Insert Used to open all object windows in the Object menu Library Used to open and generate picture library Cut Used to delete the object chosen and copy it to the paste buffer area The shortcut key 1s Ctrl X Copy Used to copy the object chosen to the paste buffer area The shortcut key is Ctrl C Duplicate Used to copy several graphs chosen in horizontal and vertical directions increasing the address by 0 255 units The shortcut key is Ctrl D Paste Used to copy the object in the paste buffer area to the current screen The shortcut key is Ctrl V Delete Used to delete a chosen object The shortcut key is Ctrl Del Select All Used to se
68. or horizontally at will Grid Used to set and cancel in the current screen grids whose widths have been selected Grid width Used to change the grid width of the current screen The range of such change is 4 16 Border scale Used to add or cancel scale lines on the left top corner of the picture window The forward screen Used to open the screen numbered before the current screen The backward screen Used to open the screen numbered after the current screen Open screen property Used to open property window of object if an object is chosen or screen if no object is chosen Information output window Used to open and close information output window Project manager Used to open and close the project manager Find address Used to find an address being used Address table Used to open and close an address table being used Address table is a list of addresses of objects for the purpose of convenient searching and replacing View menu In View menu you can choose whether to display Standard tool bar Drawing tool bar Information output window and other interfaces so that you can set working interface of the software basing on particular needs Draw menu This menu is mainly used to draw pictures SamDraw provides Line L Polyline B Curve Arc A Free line Straight Connection Line Curve Connection Line Rectangle R Ellipse E Polygon Y Text T Open Library O Build Library C Set
69. out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is O or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 373 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 21 Connection between Hollysys PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of Hollysys LM series PLC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of Hollysys LM series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with Hollysys LM series PLC How to establish connection Hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen Hollysys PLC programming port RS232 port RS232 communication port D female connector D male connector 374 Shenzhen
70. port of Allen Bradley AB series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor the PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen Allen Bradley AB RS232 port RS232 communication port D female connector 8 pin male connector 8 pin male 403 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Software setting Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model Communication port Data bit Touch screen address PLC address Communication time Allen Bradle AB Select the corresponding PLC for different models At present Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports Allen Bradley AB DF1 protocol Adopt standard RS232 serial communication Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communicati
71. screen a time control to display time Date display Used to insert in the current screen a date control to display date Day of week display Used to insert in the current screen a day of week control to display day of week Static picture Used to insert in the current screen a static picture from local disk Picture display Used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying several pictures GIF display Used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying static or animated 46 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 pictures with an extension name of GIF Trend chart Used to create in the current screen a trend chart control to monitor change trend of the values of continuous addresses of the connected device XY trend chart Used to create in the current screen an XY trend chart control to monitor the ratio between the values of two continuous addresses of the connected device Dynamic circle Used to create in the current screen a dynamic circle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Dynamic rectangle Used to create in the current screen a dynamic rectangle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Alarm control Used to create in the current screen an alarm box control to display the
72. shown in figure 9 4 PLC ES 485 PLC is primary station COBBTHnIcatio u port Slave station 1 Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Smakoon SA Senkoon SA Seankoon SA The communicate port of all touch screens is RS 465 ES 465 RS485 All touch screens are slave stations Figure 9 4 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens When PLC RS485 is primary station When the communication port of PLC is RS485 all touch screens are slave stations The system 296 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 setting 1s same to the case when the communication port is RS232 Please refer to figures 9 2 and 9 3 for operation When Samkoon SA series touch screens are treated as slave station 255 touch screens can be connected at most However pay attention that when the quantity of touch screen connected exceeds some limit the response speed may become low m When the first touch screen is primary station all other screens and PLC are slave station 1 The communication port RS232 connected with PLC connection method and system setting of host are as shown in figures 9 5 9 6 and 9 7 Touch is primary station Se ee ee ea PLC is slave machine Sankoon SA A jFLC is ES ES 27327 E5 485 conwerter 232 communica P tion port ES 232 signal Slave station 1 Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Saakoon SA Senkoon SA Semkoon SA Fo
73. size in the current screen Polygon Used to draw a polygon of any shape in the current screen Text Used to create a transparent rectangular box in the current screen in where any words can be typed Open library Used to open the picture library of the system Build library Used to generate a picture library file basing on the pictures drawn by the user for the purpose of future use 44 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Set OFF status Used to set all digit operation objects in the current screen to OFF status Set ON status Used to set all digit operation objects in the current screen to ON status Table Used to create a table of specified number of rows and columns in the current screen Scale Used to draw required scale Object menu Object menu consists of a group of touch keys and functional keys including Bit Button Word Button Screen Button Function Button Bit Lamp Multi state Lamp Numeric Display Numeric Entry ASCII Character Display ASCII Character Entry Bar Graph Time Display Date Display Day of Week Display Static Picture Picture Display GIF Display Trend Chart XY Trend Chart Dynamic Circle Dynamic Rectangle Alarm Control Dynamic Alarm Bar Historic Alarm Dialog Graphics Move Meter Multi state Switch Historic Record Display Message Display Multi function Button and Flow Block Object menu corresponds the third row of the tool bar See Figure
74. steps to set a Word Button are as follows gt Choose Word Button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 59 will Pop up Ford Button General Label Advanced Visibility ID FeODOO Border Color i FG Color BG Color Fattern Fume ti on Set Constant Enter Value O Add O Subtract Data Type Write Address Constant Figure 4 59 Word Button dialog E Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Function module 120 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Set Constant Different types of data can be chosen SamDraw provides several data types including 16 32 digit positive integer 16 32 digit integer 16 32 digit BCD positive integer and 32 digit floating point number This option is to write the constant set by you to the write address For example if the write address is LW1 and the constant is 10 then each time the button is touched the value of LW1 will be set to constant 10 regardless of its original value Enter value Different data types can be chosen This option is to write a value that is the numeric value set by you to the write address This value must be between the maximum value and minimum value Then when you touch the Word Button a keyboard will pop up on the touch screen and you can enter desired value See Figure 4 60 Figure 4 60 Total d
75. the address each time according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of circle center Y coordinate of circle center and radius of the circle Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 168 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 5 5 Dynamic rectangle With similar functions to Dynamic Circle Dynamic Rectangle is also used to change the position and size of the graph basing on the change in the value of the monitored address and thus to show real time change of the monitored address on a dynamic basis Click Dynamic Rectangle icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 94 will appear Dynamic Rectangle General Visibility ID DROOOO Data Type 1B6 Bit Unsigned I Monitor Address Controllable Rectangle Position e Solid BG Color A Border Anchor Point Border Color a Upper Left Upper Right E Lower Left a Lower Right Figure 4 94 Dynamic Rectangle dialog This control reads values of four addresses to respectively define X coordinate Y coordinate width and height of the rectangle Reading of these values should be based on the data type set by the user For example If the Data Type chosen by the user is 16 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW2 LW3 and LW4 will be read respectively with the 169 Shenzhen Samkoon s S
76. the five elements are a 0 a 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 5 The square bracket can not include the element quantity of variables but symbol constant or constant expression is available For instance define FD 5 void main int a 3 2 b 7 FD is legal However the following expression form is incorrect void main i int n 5 int a n 6 Itis allowed that the same type declaration can describe several arrays and several variables For example int a b c d k1 10 k2 20 1 Representation of array element Array elements are the basic unit of array It is also a variable which is identified with array name and a subscript The subscript indicates the sequence number of element in the array The general form of array element is array name subscript Wherein subscript is integer constant or integer expression only If it has decimal this value will be integer automatically by C programming For example a 5 a it j a 1 are the legal array elements Array element is usually called subscript variable The subscript variable could not be used unless array is defined In C language the subscript variable is used one by one rather than the whole array The general form of initialization assignment is static type specifier array name constant expression value Wherein static refers to the static storage type It is specified that only static storage array and external storage array can be initialized assignment
77. the mouse to the larger green dot and then the mouse shape will become A Press down the left key of the mouse and move it to rotate the graph to appropriate position and then release the left key If you move the mouse clockwise the chosen graph will rotate clockwise around the fixed center If you move the mouse anticlockwise the chosen graph will rotate anticlockwise around the fixed center See Figure 4 11 Selected graphics object selected to rotate after command Hold down the little areen point don t move drazzing the mouse ta the center of rotation 86 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Mowe the mouse to big green point as shown in figure shape mouse into can rotate Hold down the left key not ta put the mouse around the small green dot rotating objects ta the desired location Figure 4 11 Steps of free rotation gt Horizontal overturning Horizontal rotation allows designers to overturn a chosen graph object or several graph objects by 180 around a vertical center line Use of the horizontal overturning command is simple First choose one or more graph objects then click Horizontal Overturn command in Rotary option in Edit menu or click horizontal overturn button din the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Horizontal Overturn command in Rotary option in the right click
78. the relevant static storage and external storage concepts will be introduced in Chapter 5 in C language The data in are the initial value of each element and the elements are spaced with comma such as static 205 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 int a 1OJ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 which is equivalent to a 0 0 a 1 1 a 9 9 2 There are several provisions for initial assignment of array in C language 1 Itis allowed to assign initial value for partial elements When the elements in is less than element quantity the initial value is assigned for the front only For example static int a 10 0 1 2 3 4 it indicates that the initial value will be assigned for the first 5 elements a 0 al 4 and the last 5 elements will be assigned 0 automatically 2 Assign initial value for element one by one and the overall assignment for array is unavailable For example if assigning 1 for 10 elements it can write to be static int a 10 J 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 rather than static int a 10 1 3 If the initial value assignment is unavailable for all arrays with initialization all elements will be 0 4 If assigning all elements the array element quantity may not be given in the array declaration For example static int a 5 1 2 3 4 5 can be written as static int a 1 2 3 4 5 The dynamic assignment can be made during program execution In this case it can use do statement and scanf functi
79. to call other applications of SamDraw open simulation panel and to simulate the current project configuration on PC to check the effect or modify the screen Please save the project before off line simulation USB download Used to download the compiled project configuration to the touch screen via the USB cable supplied along with the product Before downloading please compile and save the project configuration Compile download Used to directly download the compiled project configuration to the touch screen via the USB cable supplied along with the product without first clicking Compile before 49 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Download Help menu Help menu is used to call the help file of SamDraw and the version number and copyright statement of the software See Figure 2 32 tf Help About Samllraws 3 Figure 2 32 Help menu The help file is shown in Figure 2 33 Figure 2 33 Help file Version number and copyright statement of SamDraw are shown in Figure 2 34 About SasDrav S SamUraws 3 0 Version Copyright Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Warning Unauthorized Reproduction Copying Fart or ALL of the Contents of this Software Would Constitute a Tort Figure 2 34 Version number and copyright statement Right click menu To provide convenience for users a right click menu is set in the software meeting the operation habit
80. touch screen and the male one is connected to MITSUBISHI PLC The serial cable is not more than 12m 329 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samkoon touch screen COM1 or MITSUBISHI CPU unit COM2 programming port 8DIN round DB9 female male Communication cable type CA _FX_ 1 J Connect with communication module RS232BD The 9 pin serial port DB9 9 hole port DB9 is apopied Female connector d connected to Samkoon touch screen and the male one is connected to RS232BD module The serial cable is not more than 12m Communication cable type CA_FX 2 330 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 J Connect with communication module RS485BD The 9 pin serial port DB9 5 hole terminal is adopted Female connector is connected to Samkoon touch screen and the male one is connected to RS485BD module The cable length is not more than 12m Communication cable type CB_FX485 2 Software setting Default setting of system D8120 H0086 indicates the communication with 9600 7 even 1 stop bit without command head and command tail without check sum for the command without protocol The touch screen setting must be same with that of PLC Communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Stop bit length 331 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Parity check bit Even Operational address range
81. touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 422 485 Baud rate Data bit length 360 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Stop bit length l Parity check bit None PLC address l Operational address range 0 9999 1dddd Input bit register 0 9999 3dddd Analog input register 0 9999 4dddd Holding register Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Select the correct communication port or not 5 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 361 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 18 Description of communication protocol of MODBUS Slave station with built in HMI in Samkoon series Overview
82. vivid See Figure 4 39 Figure 4 39 An example of an ellipse circle drawn 103 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 3 9 Polygon Choose Polygon command in Draw menu or click Polygon command button J in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw polygon in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a polygon will be drawn left click the mouse or press down and hold and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be the starting position of the polygon to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Move the mouse to other appropriate positions and each time the left key 1s clicked a side of the polygon will be drawn Right click the mouse to complete polygon drawing See Figure 4 40 Figure 4 40 Drawing a polygon gt To change the shape of the polygon first click the polygon and then several green dots will appear on the polygon frame depending on number of sides of the polygon indicating that the polygon has been chosen Then move the mouse to any of these dots and the mouse will change tol Press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to a desired target position of this point of the polygon to change the lengths and positions of the tw
83. 0 to 65 C Ambient humidity for running 10 to 90 RH non condensable Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 266x20840 5 mm Opening dimension 260202 mm Weight About 2 2kg Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 10 4 Main technical parameters Model SA 10 4A SA 10 4B Display size 10 4 length width 4 3 Resolution 800x600 800x480 Brightness 450cd m Color 262 144 pigments Contrast 450 1 Service life of back light 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate Communication interface USB RS232 RS422 RS485 User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 8 W Power consumption CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 1 000V AC 1 minute Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature for running 10 to 65 C Ambient humidity for running 10 to 90 RH non condensable Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 312x225x54 mm Opening dimension 285x213 mm Weight About 2 2kg Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 NO Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 12 1 Main technical parameters Model SA 12 1A Display size 12 1 length width 4 3 Resolution 800x600 Brightness 450cd m Color 262 1
84. 01 JLA ORS Gime nsiOnal AA y cceecke Mach tnaeda sss a EE E EE 203 Se CHO SU NAY coos saci a N A 206 5 2 C Paneua ee programine pre Mimi a yee hase cats celina E cies E 208 Jade StatemMenlor C procrattys t5 ica ele tau cem ee ae Aca Sele Aatee eae scala as 208 5 2 23 Branchstract re pro crass tose tecih natscstet E a A T O Ea 209 Iae SWOS DIOD aa a R RE E E E E R AR 214 Be Ae LOOPS MS PrO a oa fe aa eae e ea e a a e 214 SD Torsten tas atari ai ais aan aan aan aa aeons 216 DRO HORA Sae MC MU e vuotephdestaes Suotephedesiaes Mote hadeniaes Meta hdeniaen woke hdeataen weak ecu 217 Jale PConMnue state memi sse e e EN E E E E ONSA 217 BS CEU IAS UNI AT at gira de retained ta wel ald ences ta A escuela wk natal en E 219 5 3 Macro Function Tat CULO sia feras eto E alice dace aha tak T A Rehan 221 5 3 1 How to use macro function for programming ccceeeseessseeccccceeeeeeeecaaaaeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 221 5 3 2 Function button introduction 1n macro editor sssr eaa E ESE E 221 Dee OW TOMIEW CLE ALS MaC Oea E E EE 222 5 3 4 How to insert library function 1n the progra eoe E E E EE E TENE 225 5 3 5 How to use internal storage area in MaCL0 eceecccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeesasseesseesseeeeeees 225 5 4 QuickStart A Simple MaCro lO Ck x tesciisccs edetenddendnenadiecnnsadatdwenedeinensdeddgaeoubinyaadeblaeieteetnenadaniaciadaiiects 227 Dale Sonrcocode COST MO Mac Onise Soe Shas acetate thin
85. 13 HIBYTE Description Retrieve the high byte from the low word of a specified value Usage result HIB Y TE source Example short source 0x1234 result result HIB Y TE source result 0x12 14 HIWORD 245 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Description Retrieve the high word from the specified value Usage result HIWORD source Example int source 0x45232568 result result HIWORD source result 0x1234 15 INVBIT Description Set specific bit to be inversed ON gt OFF OFF gt ON Usage INVBIT source result Example short source 0x6 bit pos 1 result result INVBIT source bit_pos result 4 16 LOBYTE Description Retrieve the low byte from the specified value Usage result LOBY TE source Example short source 0x1234 result result LOBYTE source result 0x34 17 LOWORD 246 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Description Retrieve the low word from the specified value Usage result LOWORD source Example int source 0Qx12345678 result result LOWORD source result 0x5678 18 PUTCHARS This function is applied for free port communication only Description Send data to communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Usage PUTCHARS PortID Data Length Example char Data 5 0x02 0x30 0x31 Ox4d OxS5Se int Length checksum PortID Len
86. 2 USB interfaces are provided in SA 5 7A SA 5 7B and SA 5 7C These USB interfaces use B type female interfaces 1 B type female interface and 1 A type female interface are provided in SA 5 7A 13 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SA 5 7B and SA 5 7C For connection of different PLCs the definitions of the communication interfaces are also different Users need to specify the types of the PLCs to be connected at the time of ordering so that appropriate communication cables can be provided Figure 1 9 shows a panel equipped with two serial interfaces and a B type female USB interface use COM CUM FC connector ELC communication interface Figure 1 9 Side panel of SA series 1 4 4 Operation indicator light Operation state indicator lights on the touch screen include power indicator light PWR operation indicator light RUN and communication indicator light COM See Figure 1 10 When the touch screen is powered on the PWR light is on green when the touch screen CPU is running normally RUN light is on yellow and when CPU fails RUN light is Figure 1 10 Operation indicator off When a PLC is connected the COM light is flashing MEMS OL SEREGE yellow Table 1 1 shows the display statuses of the three LED indicator lights on different working state Green LED PWR Yellow LED RUN Yellow LED COM No power supply Power on CPU running S a Communication with connected
87. 200 187 5k Parity check odd check even check no check Data bit 7 8 Stop bit 0 1 Communication mode RS232 485 422 7 2 Setting 7 2 1 Parameter setting of touch screen The HMI model selected for project can be designated at the time of project establishment and also be changed at configuration The HMI model currently used in project can be altered through selecting the parameter setting command of touch screen in project manager 261 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Double click the option Parameter Setting of Touch Screen in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 3 Samkoon General Setup HII Paraneter Setting Madel WMI Model ISA 10 4A 8004 800 10 fie Display Type Other Screen Splash Levels Level en Sereen Saver Time l di 1 3 z min TITT Flicker Frequency 10 e wO lz Tinos STEEN CRE Level SARS Alarm Voice Ho Voice Prompts bal l Default User Level f i Touch Voice Have voice Promp Fl Seraansavrers Serisc The highest authority password Load Screen cj Mather the upload to need the password Figure 7 3 Parameter setting of touch screen Model selection the selectable model for touch screen used in project includes SA 10 4A 800x600 10 4 SA 10 4B 640x480 10 4 SA 8A 640x480 8 SA 7A 800x480 7 SA 5 7A 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7B 640x4
88. 200HW COM Communications Module RS422 Port Samkoon touch screen COM1 or COM2 DB9 pin female i LAN ONO OD 9DIND female connector Communication cable type CA OMRON 3 Communication cable C200HW COMO03 06 RS232 is connected with touch screen 326 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samkoon touch screen COM1 or COM2 C200HW COM Communications Module DB9 pin female RS422 Port Communication cable type CA OMRON 4 3 Software setting Set the communication protocol of communication port to be HostLink Set the same station address of PLC with that of touch screen Detailed settings refer to the technical manual provided by OMRON The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Operational address range 321 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 0 511 TCddd Timing and counting state 0 511 TC Vddd Elapsed timing counting value dd indicates decimal hh indicates hexadecimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable
89. 3 inh gee ee ee ie ECR Sd RS GP Sundbexie JED 32 bi L gl Sitar kchop LBL OIYE A Uble ivar ak Faf E ZNR GY Misu CH 6 00 SREP bald eid oa oo eu 55 00YE EQ Wears Yorkytation AP e74 0095 Gl Mears Workstation 4 0 FER RZT ME Loo Sh Say i Vindows Interest Explorer 8 Sh ALPRWE Me VinBAR 4 0 32 tE Sh 5 348 h AKI Fuh 29 TSB Figure 2 12 Add delete program page Second select SamDraw3 3 in the page shown in Figure 2 12 and click Change Delete button Then the system will automatically delete SamDraw3 3 and related components as introduced in Step 3 of the first method 2 5 Operation of SamDraw After installation of SamDraw a shortcut will appear on the desktop as shown in Figure 2 13 J EME Figure 2 13 Shortcut on the desktop Meanwhile SamDraw3 3 program group is added in Start menu of Windows as shown in Figure 2 14 7 ConverterCtrl S Smiri 3 jE Uninstall Sanira3 3 FJ Ver namal Figure 2 14 Program icon in Start menu Double click the shortcut on the desktop or click SamDraw3 3 exe in the SamDraw3 3 program group in the Start menu to run the software See Figure 2 15 for the software running page 33 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Sombra d Cri bh dow Bide TE PuL na Irek bjart Serea Sekirei Hlp iH D A re Ne 28 2 a OD me eSe ae aa OF om le Soe a9 eas CREAR eb aAR Pee Heth JB 525 38 5 Tro ari Buia
90. 35 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 DARREN Ea Windows RE SEC 3C2410X Test B D Z32362 SRi ERHZEIE RNE Windows Ha Sth7in tse Sunan gt Jasa Windows BES Pea ee BSE aS FERALRESTU PSD RiRwereLlte HES TMs Figure 2 17 VISTA identifies the driver Select Ask me later and then open the device manager to find the touch screen equipment Right click on the equipment and choose to update the driver See Figure 2 18 gt l TOHTA rks gh tamkoon Pc _l oveyco Rom EDE Cg IDE ATAATA PeH O H cy SR o gt 7a2N8 oF m0 com LT F iT aia amp ie ok ane Figure 2 18 Device manager page of VISTA Choose View the computer to find the driver software on the installation page See Figure 2 19 36 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt Bam m psa esr iss Windows S3Ri MY 40 Internet ORRERI gt RUPE LES a SPER IF R Figure 2 19 Driver updating page of VISTA Then view Manual installation directory and click next See Figure 2 20 a ae saree A oe tase eae a Sea ae ee T E I E R A E E ORO epeen gt BE samkoon gt ar i gt he ad usona Figure 2 20 Manual installation selecting page of VISTA Choose Always install this driver software See Figure 2 21 37 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt FESS RAAD DERTEN
91. 4 Align Align is also a group commands allowing designers to align several graph objects This command can be used only when several graph objects are chosen To select several graph objects you may click the objects while press Shift key or press the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse This command can make the configuration screen more beautiful This group command includes several commands that are Top Align Bottom Align Vertical Centering Left Align Right Align Horizontal Centering The Same Width The Same Height and The Same Height and Width gt Top Align Top Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the top boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Top Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Top Align button Tt in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Top Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move upward to align basing on the top boundaries See Figure 4 16 for a contrast before and after top align top align before top align after Figure 4 16 Contrast before and after top align gt Bottom Align Bottom Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the bottom boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Bottom Align command in Align opti
92. 44 pigments Contrast 450 1 Service life of back light 60 000 hours Touch screen plate 5 wire high precision touch plate Communication interface USB RS232 RS422 RS485 User memory 12M Power supply DC24V 415 8 W Power consumption CE certification Meeting EN50022 and EN50024 FCC compatibility Meeting FCC Class A Dielectric strength test 1 000V AC 1 minute Protection grade IP 65 front panel Ambient temperature for running 10 to 65 C Ambient humidity for running 10 to 90 RH non condensable Shell plastic Engineering plastic ABS PC Outline dimension 338x253 x65 mm Opening dimension 328x245 mm Weight About 1 8kg Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 U Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 18 Wiring Samkoon SA series touch screen requires DC 24V power supply Figure 1 12 shows the connection of the touch screen with PLC and PC ACZ2Z0 or 2380F fed Phen whih the PLC connect can AC transition DC 24 choose anyone of the serial Figure 1 12 Connection diagram of SA series touch screen USB cables for connection with PC are supplied along with the machine 24 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Quick start of SamDraw This chapter introduces installation of SamDraw configuration software including installation of configuration program and equipment drive as well as basic functions and main characteristics of
93. 50 gt Add to library Function Seleet C The selection area Import the picture Figure 4 50 Build library dialog SamDraw can save configuration pictures completed by the designers so that they can use them conveniently next time After clicking Build Library as shown in the figure above the graph object in the current screen will be displayed in the white area in the middle of the dialog 110 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt Click Save to button a dialog as shown in Figure 4 51 will pop up Puild Li br ary g User defined Cont User defined Graz Save toa Figure 4 51 Save path selection dialog gt Choose a save path in the selection box on the left SamDraw totally provides 8 self defined control libraries and graph libraries After a save path is selected click Save to button below to save the graph object At this moment the saved graph object will be displayed in the white area on the left Click OK again to complete this operation 4 4 Basic controls of SamDraw 4 4 1 Bit button Bit button is used to operation and display the ON OFF state or 1 0 state of the bit address of the device connected to the touch screen Bit button is a fundamental and the most frequently used control The steps to set a bit button are as follows 1 Click Bit Button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog will pop up for setting of bit button
94. 80 5 7 SA 5 7C 820x234 5 7 262 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SA 4 3A 480x272 4 3 SA 3 5A 320x234 3 5 Display mode The selectable mode for display direction of touch screen used in project includes Horizontal touch screen configures horizontally Vertical touch screen configures vertically Start screen Refer to the initial screen downloaded into HMI Users can select different pictures to be initial screen of touch screen as required Screen saver time Same to PC Flicker frequency It is used to set the flicker frequency of text in page Label in Controls Alarm sound Users can select whether it gives out sound when alarm happens as required Touch sound Whether it gives out sound when touching HMI Screen saver screen or not Users can select screen saver screen as required Password setting of user level There is 8 level password for users Users can change the level password and default user level as required Click OK to finish the parameter setting of touch screen J The vertical mode in display mode is only applied for models SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A 7 2 2 HMI Status HMI status setting means to write current HMI status information into PLC data register Double click the option HMI Status in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 4 263 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manu
95. AIZE XXXX SU FRPSSHteaee BAIT MSAHEA MAAP A ORJE WRAP a Figure 2 5 User information page In the target folder page select the folder where the software is to be installed The default folder is C ProgramFile SamDraw3 3 Click here to change the installation directory and then click next See Figure 2 6 SamDraws 3 InstallShield Wizard EF A a ie et ME EF Seis Pee BP See RE a tE tate lel PFE Peds SamDraw3 Ja Steal Se aS Powe BSE Se ee le o Pea Et C Program Files Samlraw3 34 l Herala AITHE sanansassnssnnnannnantnnnnSSSnnNNARANDANANDSSNNNANARANDANANDSNNNNNRRANRRNADDSNNNNSRDANRRANDASSNNNNRRANRRANDASSNSANDRANRRANDASANSNNDNANRRANDASANSASDNANDRANDRSANDSNDNNANRRANDRANNSANDNNSRDANDRENSDSNRNENRRANDRANDRNNNRENRRN Figure 2 6 Installation directory selection page Start to install the software See Figure 2 7 30 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SamDraw3 3 InstallShield Wizard TERES Selrar3 3 F RFECHIMERANEIE EESSI Figure 2 7 Installation process dialog After the installation is completed click OK to close the installation guide You can also click Display update introduction to view the introduction of the update of SamDraw3 3 See Figure 2 8 Samraj 3 InstallShield Fizard 7 Bie Be ae eet Pathe thSeteSanlraws 3E F Te sob Cf a J Figure 2 8 Installation completion page
96. AYSON PLC communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Even PLC address l Operational address range fem pa coil Output and 00001 09984 read write Odddd i auxiliary node aooo o 10001 19984 Idddd Input bit register 30001 30512 3dddd Analog input register 40001 49999 4dddd Holding register 357 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 y dddd indicates decimal l Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not 5 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with
97. Bus Controller and Samkoon series touch SCreen ecceecescesceceeces 358 10 18 Description of communication protocol of MODBUS slave station with built in HMI in SAMO OMS CICS ar hs a NN N N Sewanee oan dence Shona Geen kanes 361 10 19 Connection between Koyo series PLC and Samkoon series touch SCreen ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 366 10 20 Connection between Hitachi PLC and Samkoon SA series touch SCLreeD c cc ceeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 369 10 21 Connection between Hollysys PLC and Samkoon SA series touch SCTreeN ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 373 10 22 Connection between ALTEC and Samkoon SA series touch SCreeD cc ceeeccccccceeeaeseeeeeeceeeeaaeees 377 10 23 Connection between IDEC PLC and Samkoon SA series touch SCreen cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 380 10 24 Connection between YOKOGAWA PLC and Samkoon SA series touch SCreen ccccceeeeeeees 384 10 25 Connection between ZHENGHANG Electronics PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen 388 10 26 Connection between ADVANTECH distributed I O and Samkoon SA series touch screen 392 10 27 Connection between GE FANUC PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen cccseeeeeeeeeeees 395 10 28 Connection between TAIAN TPO3 Series PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen 398 10 29 Connection between Allen Bradley AB PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen 66 402 E C O
98. C e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 336 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 10 Connection between FUJI NB series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from FUJI NB series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of FUJI NB series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection
99. D F oo gf ad AA FP om HEE fY9 949i GRR AST Be AD ee See RErP gE BES eS se Froject Ranager ey Set iy ML Siwius HAT parameter tetting a FLO Control RE Clark File Pretec lion Higlaracal Duala Loggar J Alar Log f Tigiial Alarm Lag l Analog Albarn Log Cer dioatas Leet Top Size Aidth Figure 6 6 Project screen after completed creation of new project Add controls into project V Click icon Value Input Display in toolbar Set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes of the controls in popped up dialog box The Write Address is D5 And select the option Monitoring address is same to write address Value of all other attributes is default value Click the button OK to display the controls on screen Vv Click the icon Word Button to pop up a dialog box Then set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes of the controls in the box Select in module Function Write Address is D5 Enter 5 in column Constant Usually other attributes of page are of default values Click the page tab Label and enter D5 5 in box Text of page Text Click OK to display the controls on screen Vv Click the icon Bar Graph in toolbar to pop up a dialog box Then set background color color sample of bar graph and background color sample of bar graph Select Right
100. EEE b SEEEEEEE a lt 33333 33333 198 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 b lt 33333 33333333333 Practice float int a 32 float b double d b 12345678 d b 100 d d a d d 58 123456 Character Characters include character constant and character variable Character constant Character constant is a character within single quote For example a b are the legal character constants In the C language the character constants are always characterized as following 1 Character constant must be included in single quote rather than double quotes or other brackets 2 Character constant must be single character rather than character string 3 Character may be any character in the character set However the figure can not be involved in numerical operation after been defined as character For example 5 and 5 is different 5 is character constant that are not involved in operation Character variable The character variable value is character constant 1 e single character Its type specifier is char The form and written rules of character variable declaration is same with that of integer variable For example char a b As each character variable is assigned to a byte memory one character is saved only The character value is kept in the memory unit with ASCII code For example the decimal ASCII code for x is 120 and the decimal ASCII code fo
101. HAIWELL PLC programming COM2 port DB9 pin female 4 core S terminal 00000 9DIND female connecter 353 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 pin male connector Communication cable type CA HW 2 Software setting PLC address is defaulted to be 1 Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of HAIWELL The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length 2 Parity check bit None PLC address l Operational address range E fot RO Moo po feee aa S ly ooo ps feee pa 354 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 C 0 255 read write C ddd Counter ddd indicates decimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distan
102. It supports the function codes 0x01 0x03 0x05 0x06 0x10 of MODBUS protocol With the help of these function codes LB bit address LW word address and RWI word address can be read and written 1 MODBUS frame format J Function code 0x01 01 read coil Request frame format slave address 0x01 initial address of coil coil quantity CRC checkout 2 0x01 function code Read coil coil BR address of coil 2 bytes a order first low order behind See coil address 4 Coil quantity High order first low order behind N CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Response frame format slave address Ox01 bytes coil state CRC checkout 4 Coil state N 7 8 bytes Every 8 coils are one byte If the last one is insufficient with 8 the undefined part is 0 The first 8 coils are at the first byte and the coil with the smallest address is at the lowest bi and the like Error response see error response frame 362 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 VY Function code 0x03 03 read register Request frame format slave address 0x03 initial address of register register quantity CRC checkout Initial address of High order first low order behind See register register address Register quantity High order first low order behind N CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Response frame format slave address 0x03 bytestregister value CRC checkout i Slave
103. NIE ee eee ee eee ne Pen FMR mnt A EE O E eee ee ne eee eae eee Pee 406 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 1 Hardware manual 1 1 General Samkoon SA series touch screens are high quality human machine interface products integrating CPU module output module display screen memory and some other modules It can be widely used in various control systems of different industries Optimized design of hardware and software is adopted so that the touch precision and screen color of the product meet the requirements for machine control Samkoon SA series touch screens have the following models SA 12 1A SA 10 4A SA 10 4B SA 10 2SA SA 8A SA 8B SA 7A SA 7B SA 5 7A SA 5 7B SA 5 7C SA 5 7D SA 5 7E SA 5 7F SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A Samkoon SA series touch screens are open human machine interface products providing standard serial interfaces for connection with other equipment It mainly supports serial communication including communication with currently popular PLCs such as Mitsubishi s PLC products Siemens PLC products Omron s PLC products and Modicon s PLC products Meanwhile communication drive can be developed upon request of users The configuration software of Samkoon SA series touch screen is SamDraw which provides users with screen configuration drive setting control and some other functions The up to date version of this software is V3 3 1 2 Model and description At pr
104. PLC includes MA and MC series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen V Connect with PLC programming port 350 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 O0O 00000 9DIND female connector 4 pin male Communication cable type CA_FATEK232 2 Software setting PLC address is defaulted to be 1 Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of FACON The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Stop bit length Parity check bit 351 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 PLC address l Operational address range ime fem read write Mdddd read write Sdddd 0 255 read write Tddd Timer 0 255 read write Cddd 0 9999 read write HRdddd 0 9999 read write DRdddd ddd indicates decimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not
105. PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 358 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 17 Connection between ModBus _ Controller and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of ModBus Controller register by Samkoon series touch screen It uses standard MODBUS RTU protocol It establishes serial communication connection with the communication port of ModBus Controller through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the device application It supports all controllers with ModBus RTU protocols e How to establish connection with ModBus Controller 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port EODEUS CONTROLLER A WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen ModBus RS232 port VY ModBus RS422 port 359 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samkoon touch screen COM1 or COM2 DB9 pin female Modan Controalber 2 Software setting PLC communication mode must be RTU mode and the station address is consistent with that of touch screen Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of ModBus RTU protocol from SCHNEIDER PLC communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen The recommended communication parameters for
106. R series PLC and Samkoon series touch SCreeN ccceceeeceeeeeeeeees 312 10 5 Connection between MODICON MODBUS protocol and Samkoon series touch screen 315 10 6 Connection between MODICON Unitelway protocol and Samkoon series touch screen 318 10 7 Connection between OMRON series PLC and Samkoon series touch Screen ccsseeeeeeeeeeees 321 10 8 Connection between MITSUBISHI FX A series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 328 10 9 Connection between SIEMENS S7 200 series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 333 10 10 Connection between FUJI NB series PLC and Samkoon series touch Screen ccccsseceeeeeeeees 336 10 11 Connection between KDN K3 series PLC and Samkoon series touch Screen cceseeeeeeeeeees 339 10 12 Connection between DELTA DVP series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 00008 342 10 13 Connection between LG MASTER Kxxx series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 346 10 14 Connection between FACON FB series PLC and Samkoon series touch screeni ecceeeees 349 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 15 Connection between HAIWELL S H series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 6 352 10 16 Connection between TECHWAYSON V80 series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen 355 10 17 Connection between Mod
107. RDEC Description Convert a string to a decimal value Usage result ASCII2DEC source sizeof source Example char source 4 2 3 4 S short result result ASCIH2DEC source 4 result 2345 3 ASCIIAFLOAT Description Convert a string to a floating value Usage result ASCII2FLOAT source sizeof source Example char source 4 5 7 8 float result 241 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 result ASCH2FLOAT source 4 result 5 78 4 ASCIRHEX Description Convert a string to a hexadecimal value Usage result ASCII2HEX source sizeof source Example char source 5 1 6 3 4 short result result ASCH2HEX source 4 result 0x1634 5 BCD2BIN Description Convert a BCD value to a BIN value Usage result BCD2BIN source Example short source 0x2648 short result result BCD2BIN source result 1234 6 BIN2ZBCD Description Convert a binary value to a BCD value Usage result BIN2BCD source Example 242 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 short source 1234 short result result BIN2BCD source result Ox1234 7 CRC Description Get 16 bit CRC Usage bit CRC CRC source sizeof source Example char source S5 Oxl 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short bit CRC bit_ CRC CRC source 5 8 DEC2ZASCII Description Convert a decimal
108. SA series touch screen If there occurs an extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of ADVANTECH distributed I O series PLC ADVANTECH ADAM 4017 394 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Data0 Data7 Data ddd ADVANTECH ADAM 4060 Relay0 Relay3 Relay ddd ddd indicates the decimal ADAM 4017 Data of register is displayed with floating point Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 395 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 27 Connection between GE FANUC PLC and Samkoon SA
109. SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 O eertHs K IBk TH BIE Seon WEH mT FS EmA tR a LIDZ 12231551 E IDE ATA ATAPI 42 58 T oha cme HHR SRO YW WoO com A LET ite al T HWA BER ty AA SES ES aes O ERA eet gt RA ST ee Generic VSE Hub Generic VEB Hub Intel BR 6 Serias C200 Series Chipset Family USB Enhanced Host Controller 1C26 Intel R B Series C200 Series Chipset Fanily WSR Enhanced Host Controller 1C21 g ankoon HMI Tach Corp s USB Root Hab USE Root Hab E E fa Figure 3 15 Searching for USB driver of the touch screen 3 4 Uploading of SamDraw configuration project SamDraw3 3 allows uploading of configuration from HMI to hard disk To do this connect HMI with PC choose Upload potion in Download menu and then an uploading dialog will appear File Fath C Documents and Pee eae dni ete sees Eley E S A EAA E E EE EE E E E E A A EEE Project Hame UploadName ae ee ee Start Upload File path Click Browse to choose the directory for file saving Project name Enter the name of the project to be uploaded Upload Click this button to start uploading 76 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 After successful uploading you may choose whether to open the project uploaded Upload File Fath C Documents and Settingsh dministrator pre set Fone Uploaded successfully Uploaded successfully TTTT TTTT
110. Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 9 pin female 9 pin male Software setting of SamDraw3 2 configuration screen edition Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model Hollysys LM Select the corresponding PLC for different models At present series Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports Hollysys LM series PLC Communication RS232 Adopt standard RS232 serial communication Port type Baud rate 38400 Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Data bit Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Checkout Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Stop bit l Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station Touch screen 375 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 address and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several s
111. Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Click Global Macro in menu Set to pop up a dialog box as shown in following figure Global Hacro global Macro Name a 1 5 5 5 6 T 5 Click the list item to list all successfully compiled macro names Then the selected macro instruction will be treated as global macro to be executed during configuration operation 7 10 Setting of initial macro Set one successfully compiled macro instruction to be initial macro When the configuration begins to run 1 e execute the macro instruction it is not limited by screen 64 initial macros can be added at most When multiple initial macros are set they will be executed according to the set serial number at the time of installation Click Initial Macro in menu Set to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure below 288 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Initial Macro Initial Macro Name l 5 E d E 6 T 5 Click the list item to list all successfully compiled macro names Then the selected macro instruction will be treated as initial macro to be executed during configuration operation 289 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 8 System Reserved Register SamDraw keeps some registers for special purpose Users have to use these registers according to related instructions These registers include LB l
112. Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Preface Thanks very much for purchasing the SA series touch screen products of Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd is a national hi tech enterprise involved in research and development of industrial visual touch control products core technology of human machine interface as well as development manufacture and selling of advanced industrial control products With over 6 years of development it has accumulated great strengths and become leading in the related national and even global industry by virtue of its strong R amp D and innovation capability core technologies that are not based on any system and for which the Company has 100 independent intellectual property right and high cost effectiveness of the products Samkoon s SA series human machine interface HMI products are mainly used in industrial control to realize visual touch control With excellent performance they are increasingly widely used in various industries such as textile machines dyeing machines plastic and rubbery machines plastic injection molding machines packaging machines ultrasonic wave equipment electronic welding machines printing machines food making machines medical machines woodworking machines lifting equipment intelligent buildings water treatment equipments power system rail transport coal system petrochemical
113. TT nal ol Whether to open TTTTT TT BLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLL LLLLLL 3 5 SamDraw converter SamDraw3 3 has a remarkable functional improvement compared with SamDraw3 2 and project files generated by SamDraw3 2 cannot be directly opened using SamDraw3 3 Thus conversion is required SamDraw3 3 provides a tool to convert V3 2 project files to V3 3 ones that is the Converter E to start up the Converter or start up it from Start Programs al i Start up SamDraw3 3 click SamDraw3 3 Convert 3 2 projects TI Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software ae ee fe SamDraw Converter Function Selection Convert Sanlrar3 Z to Sanlrar3 3 C Upload Historical Data C Upload Recipe Data 1 Choose Convert SamDraw3 2 to SamDraw3 3 to convert V3 2 configuration files to V3 3 ones Convert SasDraw 3 7 to V3 3 Open Samlravws 2 Version File I Open File Samira 3 New Project Hew Froject Hame Stored Fath Begin to Convert Choose Convert SamDraw3 2 to SamDraw3 3 to enter the conversion page Click Open to choose a V3 2 project file to be converted and type in the name of the target V3 3 project file Then click Browse to set the path for saving of the V3 3 project file Then click Begin to convert and after 78 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 conversion completion click Close Th
114. Usage checksum ADDSUM data sizeof ldatal Example char data 5 0x1 On 0x3 Oxd Ox20 int checksum checksum ADDSUM data 5 J yochecksum Ox 4 Figure 5 6 Function Selection 5 3 5 How to use internal storage area in macro 226 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SamDraw configuration software provides the operation interface for HMI internal storage area Users can make direct operations for the internal storage area in the macro Detailed methods have two kinds 1 Access storage area with keywords LocalBit reference of internal storage area LB LocalWord reference of internal storage area LW RW IWord reference of internal storage area RWI The keyword can be used directly in macro For example if LocalBit 5 t LocalWord 1 0 else t LocalWord 1 1 j 2 Establish a linkage between variable and internal storage area by setting of variable Detailed usage refers to macro instance 22 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 4 QuickStart A Simple Macroblock 5 4 1 Source code design of macro Let us come to compile a simple macroblock New create a project and select the corresponding touch screen model This macroblock will realize simple operations as following make initialization for numeral entry display control with array element value of char source 4 2 3 4 5 by Init macro then read th
115. Used to set border color for the trend chart The change in the color can be seen only after clicking OK button BG Color Used to set background color for the trend chart The change in the color can be seen only after clicking OK button Data Type Totally 7 data types are provided Read Trigger The curves will move only when this option is set to 1 Number of Data Number of pens that is number of lines 8 pens at most Number of Data Points per Data The number of values that can be displayed by X axis Sampling Time Sampling frequency Read Address Value of read address presents the value of each pen in Y axis Basing on different data groups and data type read address may be subject to continuous reading 16 digit data or separated reading 32 digit data 161 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 For example If the data type is 16 digit data the number of data is 8 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 8 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 Value of pen 1 LW4 Value of pen 2 LWS Value of pen 3 LW6 Value of pen 4 LW7 Value of pen 5 LW8 Value of pen 6 LW9 Value of pen 7 LW10 Value of pen 8 Thus if 16 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of N addresses can be read continuously according to different address rules of the PLC If the data type is 32 digit data the number of data is 5 and the read add
116. V3 3 it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 388 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 25 Connection between ZHENGHANG Electronics PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of ZHENGHANG Electronics A5 series PLC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of ZHENGHANG Electronics A5 series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with ZHENGHANG Electronics A5 series PLC How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen ZHENGHANG Electronics A5 series RS232 port RS232 communication port D female connector 9 pin male connector 389 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 9 pin female 9 pin male
117. address 1 byte Set in parameter Register value Every two bytes indicate a register value High order first low order behind The smaller register value is in front CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Error response see error response frame J Function code 0x05 05 write unicoil Request frame format slave address 0x05 coil address coil address CRC checkout Coil address High order first low order behind See coil 363 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 D a a 4 Coil state 2 bytes High order first low order behind Any non 0 is valid CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Response frame format slave address Ox05 coil address coil state CRC checkout 3 Coil address 2 bytes High order first low order behind See coil address 4 Coil state 2 bytes High order first low order behind Any non 0 is valid CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Error response see error response frame JV Function code 0x06 06 write single register Request frame format slave address 0x06 register address register value CRC checkout 0x06 function code Write single register Register address High order first low order behind See register address Register value High order first low order behind Any non 0 is valid CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Response frame format slave address 0x06 register address reg
118. al V3 3 Bacro LCompiler m Do gt Rx fA AM finclude acee tn atl If Macro main char source 4 3 4 5 6 5 LWO source 4 LWi source 1 LWe source 2 W3 source 3 kw _ L L e Address ects E Figure 5 9 Code Compile in Macro Compiler Step 3 lt Tag Setting gt As shown in Figure 5 8 variable setting it records the tag name tag type and other property settings Double click the tag name window or right click the shortcut menu to select new tag and pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Make settings for the tag property in Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Then click OK to save the settings 231 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Hew Hacro Code Tag Figure 5 10 Macro Code Tag Tag Name input LWO LW1 LW2 LW3 SumLW respectively in the tag name Data Type set 16 bit integer Read write select readable and writable read write Address LWO0 0 LW 1 1 LW2 2 LW3 3 SumLW 4 after setting completes it is shown as following Figure 5 11 Baad 100 i 16 Bit Uns 1 2 16 Bit Wns i Read 100 3 J6 Bit Uns 1 Read 100 4 16 Bit Uns 1 Eoad 100 Hew Figure 5 11 Tag Setting Step 4 lt Compile source file gt After the above steps the next 1s comp
119. al V3 3 status State HMI Information Write to FLC v The Present Screen Index oe a m v The Present Recipe Index Figure 7 4 Setting of HMI status Serial number of current screen Write the serial number of current HMI screen into PLC Serial number of current recipe when there is recipe write the serial number of current recipe into PLC Current user level write current user level into PLC Click OK to finish setting of HMI status 7 2 3 PLC control PLC control concludes switching of PLC control screen change of user level recipe alteration and operation of write recipe Double click the option PLC Control in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 5 264 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 PLC Control PLC Control FLO Control F Change the Recipe trite the Recipe The Current user Level Figure 7 5 Dialog box of PLC control Control screen switching HMI switches over screen according to value of address Control Screen Switch Control recipe change HMI changes recipe according to value of address Control Recipe Change Control recipe write HMI controls recipe write according to value of address Control Recipe Write Control current user level HMI controls current user level according to value of address Control Current User Level Click OK to fin
120. alysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 380 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 23 Connection between IDEC PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from IDEC MICRO Smart FC series by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of IDEC MICRO Smart FC series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor the PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with IDEC MICRO Smart FC series PLC How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with PLC thro
121. amDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Dynamic Display General visibility peona g Controllable Center all Radius ata Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Monitor Address Circle w Solid BGColor BE Border Forder Color E Figure 4 93 Dynamic Circle dialog This control reads values of three addresses to define X coordinate Y coordinate and radius of the circle Reading of these values should be based on the data type set by the user Controllable Only Center is chosen The circle moves along with the change of the position of the center with the radius being unchanged Only Radius is chosen The circle changes along with the change of the radius with the center being unchanged Both Center and Radius is chosen Not only the radius of the circle changes along with the value of the monitored address the X coordinate and Y coordinate of the center changes along with the values of the monitored addresses Solid If this option is not checked the circle will be a hollow circle without background color if this option is checked the circle will be filled with the background color defined in BG Color 167 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 option Border If this option is not checked the circle will have no border line and thus the border line color cannot be changed If this option 1s checked the circle will have border line and the border
122. amDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW2 is the Y coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW3 is the width of the rectangle The value of LW4 1s the height of the rectangle Thus if the chosen Data Type is 16 digit positive integer the control can read four data continuously from the monitored address according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of the rectangle Y coordinate of the rectangle width of the rectangle and height of the rectangle If the Data Type chosen by the user is 32 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW3 LW5 and LW7 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW3 is the Y coordinate of the rectangle The value of LW5 is the width of the rectangle The value of LW7 1s the height of the rectangle Thus if the chosen Data Type is 32 digit positive integer the control can read four data from the monitored address adding 2 to the address each time according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of the rectangle Y coordinate of the rectangle width of the rectangle and height of the rectangle Controllable Only Position is chosen The width and height of the rectangle does not change with the c
123. an be used to enable or disable this function Add a Function Button on the screen and set it to alarm voice On Off Then if alarm voice is enabled in the current system it will be disabled by pressing this button if it is disabled in the current system it will be enabled by pressing this button Touch voice On Off Used to set the function of the Function Button to touch voice On Off y that is to enable or disable touch voice Then if the screen makes a sound along with touching after pressing this button it will no longer make a sound and vice versa Clear all historical data Used to clear all historical data saved in the touch screen Clear historical alarm Used to clear all historical alarm information saved in the touch screen HMI protection unlocking Used to unlock HMI protection by entering password Recipe reading amp saving Used to read and save a recipe 128 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 26 Stand by function Used as stand by function No action will be executed after pressing this button 27 Move alarm upward in historical alarm control Used to move alarm information upward in historical alarm control of the touch screen 28 Move alarm downward in historical alarm control Used to move alarm information downward in historical alarm control of the touch screen 29 Page up alarm in historical alarm control Used to page up alarm information in histo
124. and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 339 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 11 Connection between KDN K3 series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC CPU304 CPU304EX CPU306 CPU306EX CPU308 register from KDN K3 series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the device application The supported K3 series PLC includes CPU304 CPU304EX CPU306 CPU306EX and CPU308 When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port K3 series WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen VY Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 340 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA KDN232_ 1 2 Software setting Set PLC device address to
125. are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection VY Connect to HMI through CPM1 CIF02 communication cable 9 pin serial port OMRON support Hostlink treaty PLC Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect to HMI through CPM1 CIFO1 communication cable 9 pin serial port OMRON support Hostlink treaty PLC WSDAPI samkoon SA series CPMI CIFO1 i gt COBBUDICat touch screen ion ainke 322 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 VY Connect to HMI through CPM1 CIF11 communication cable 9 pin serial port QHRON support Host link treaty PLC WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen on modale V Connect to HMI through RS232 communication modules as C200H LK201 3G2A6 LK201 C200HW COM02 03 04 05 06 Terminal between different modules may be different Detailed connection refers to wiring diagram 9 pin serial port OMRON support Host link treaty PLC WSDAPI Samkoon SA series BS232 COBBUDIcat touch screen ion module V Connect to HMI through RS422 communication modules as C200H LK202 3G2A6 LK202 C200HW COM03 06 Terminal between different modules may be different Detailed connection refers to wiring diagram 9 pin serial port OMRON support Hostlink treaty PLC WSDAPI Samkoon SA series i communicat touch scre
126. array element This section will introduce the numerical array and character array others will be described in the successive sections If the array type declaration uses array in C language it must be made type declaration first The general form of array declaration is type specifier array name constant expression Wherein type specifier refers to any basic data or construction data Array name refers to the array identifier defined by users The constant expression in square bracket indicates the quantity of data elements which 1s also called array length For example int a 10 int array a contains 10 elements float b 10 c 20 float array b contains 10 elements float array c contains 20 elements char ch 20 character array ch contains 20 elements For the array type declaration there are several points as following 1 The array type actually refers to the value type of array element For the same array the data type of all elements 1s the same 2 The writing rules for array name should conform to that of identifier 3 The array name should not be same with other variable name For example void main t int a float a 10 is incorrect 204 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 The constant expression in the square bracket refers to the element quantity For example a 5 indicates that array a contains 5 elements However its subscript is started from 0 Therefore
127. art command used to create in the current screen a trend chart control to monitor change trend of the values of continuous addresses of the connected device ee Corresponding to XY trend chart command used to create in the current screen an XY trend chart control to monitor the ratio between the values of two continuous addresses of the connected device fk Corresponding to Dynamic circle command used to create in the current screen a dynamic circle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device a Corresponding to Dynamic rectangle command used to create in the current screen a dynamic rectangle whose size and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Corresponding to Dynamic alarm bar command used to create in the current screen an alarm bar that can display alarm message and move left or right Corresponding to Alarm control command used to create in the current screen an alarm box control to display the date time and message of each alarm x historical alarm box control to display the date time and message of each alarm Corresponding to Historic alarm dialog command used to create in the current screen a Corresponding to Graphics move command used to create in the current screen a graph display box whos
128. avoid mis operation over data and address After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become AA Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 141 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 4 9 Numeric entry Numeric Entry control is the most frequently used control as data analog quantity need to be operated in almost all process controls With Numeric Entry you can enter and display the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices such as speed current pressure and the like Numeric Entry has functions basically the same as Numeric Display expect that with Numeric Entry you can enter data to the data register of PLC or other connected devices in addition to data display The steps to create a Numeric Entry touch button are as follows Click Numeric Entry icon 2 in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 74 will appear Hameric Entry FG Color Border Color Bi Text Color Pattern Solid Data Type 16 Bit Unsi eed Int w Display Type 16 Bi t Unsi ene i Facia i m Write Address w Moni tor Addrass Identical to Write Address Password Input Font j Alignment Justification i C Left Zera Suppres Font Sire Total Digits Center O Leading Zero Fractional Digits CO Right Lea
129. aw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 12 Connection between DELTA DVP series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from DELTA DVP series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of DELTA DVP series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported DVP series PLC includes ES EP and EH series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port DVP Series WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen J Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 343 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA_DVP232 Connect with PLC 485 communication port tough cofmmunicStion cable Communication cable type CB DVP485 2 Software setting PLC address is defaulted to be 1 Set D1120 to be H86 Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of DELTA The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation 344 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDra
130. b 4 j else a 0 b 10 j 4 Conditional operator and conditional expression If the single assignment statement is executed only in the conditional statement it is usually realized by conditional expression which not only simplifies the process but also improves the operation efficiency Conditional operator and is a ternary operator which means three values are involved in operation The general form of conditional expression composed by conditional operators is Expression Expression 2 Expression 3 Its evaluation rule if the expression 1 is true its value of expression 2 will be the value of conditional expression otherwise the value of expression 2 will be the value of whole conditional expression Conditional expression is normally applied in assignment statement For example if a gt b max a else max b max a gt b a b is expressed with conditional expression Its semanteme is if a gt b is true assign a to max otherwise assign b to max In the application of conditional expression there are some points to be noted as following 1 The operation priority of conditional operator is lower than that of relational operator and arithmetic operator but higher than assignment operator Therefore max a gt b a b can be 214 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 removed the bracket to be max a gt b a b 2 Conditional operator and is a pair of operator which can not be s
131. be 1 in the PLC programming software The communication parameter should be consistent with that of Samkoon touch screen It is better to use the recommended setting Detailed settings refer to the relevant manual of KDN The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l Parity check bit none PLC address l Operational address range Li d indicates decimal o indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC 341 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 e Communication failure analysis lt I gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 342 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDr
132. be confirmed depending on PLC connection Please refer to Allen Bradley PLC programming manual Operational address range Operational address is determined when a Allen Bradley PLC is connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs a extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of Allen Bradley PLC Take an example of Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1200 the bit address form is ddd ddd dd The front ddd is the block address the middle ddd is the word address and the last dd is the word bit I11 00 B3 S2 N7 T4 C5 in the following table are the defaulted address block range of MicroLogix1200 in which the users may add block as required O 00 0 0_ 00 255 15 _ read write O ddd ddd dd__ output relay B B3 0 0_ B3 255 15 __ read write Bddd ddd dd__ intermediate relay _ C_ACC C_ACC5 0 read write C ACC ddd ddd ACC value of C ACC5 255 counter ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 405 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not 5 The operation control switch is ON
133. be displayed If the data type chosen is 32 digit floating point number then the decimal point will not be moved but only the set fractional digits will be displayed For example if the return number is 2 123 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed LJ Total digits The sum of the number of integer digits and fractional digits If the integer 143 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 length of the number to be displayed is longer than the set value the integer length displayed will be the integer length of the actual number For example if the return number is 2123 the data length is 2 and the number fractional digits are 1 then 212 3 will be displayed Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the Numeric Entry button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list Advanced tab of Numeric Entry This tab is mainly used to set Gain Offset and Range Check checking whether the data entered exceed the range set of the data entered Besides there are also Touch Availability and Notification options in this tab which have the same functions as the corresponding options in Bit Button control Click the Advanced tab and then a dialog as shown in 4 76 will appear Hameric Entry General Advanced Visibility v Sea
134. be set SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A have one port use COM 1 in software and can communicate with one connecting device Double click COM1 Connection of Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 1 Communication Port Properties ener al F ar am r ter Link ID Link Hame Link Type Device Server Link Fort m COMI Link Direct Connection Serial Fort MITSUBISHI v FX 2H CFU Port COMI PLC contiguous address interval lao Figure 7 1 Dialog box for setting of COM1 communicate screen Users can obtain different types of PLC in option Device Service in page and still can acquire different models of the PLC in its rear option Besides users can change Connection Name and Interval of PLC Contiguous Address Click the tab Parameter in the dialog box as shown in figure 7 2 260 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication Port Properties TEER Parameter Communication Parameters Other Baud rate 1600 i I HMI Address Data bits TO w PLC Address 0 Check o l Communication Time 20 h T f p Stop Bits l el Retry o Address Model Standard Mode Figure 7 2 Parameter setting of COM1 communication screen Parameter setting Device service manufacturer brand and CPU model of PLC Model model of PLC Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115
135. ber for the screen indicating the ordinal number of the screen and starting from 1 For example the serial number of the fifth screen is 5 Such serial number cannot be modified To change the background color of the new screen click the small black triangle on the right bottom corner and then a color selection dialog will pop up SamDraw provides abundant color options Over 200 colors are provided in the color selection box for quick selection by the user If you are not satisfied with any color in this box you can define a color by yourself by clicking on the right bottom For the purpose of such definition first choose a base color in the dialog and then drag the mouse in the square color area in the middle Then you may also drag the mouse in the rectangular box on the right to finalize the color At last click Add to self defined colors on the right bottom and then click OK to complete color definition Alternatively you may also enter the composition values of the three primary colors in the boxes above the Add to self defined colors button to get a self defined color See Figure 3 3 and 3 4 Now Screen Configuration screen lt gt _ Sorgen Hama Screenl e i Backer ound Ea ee eye j i sethackgroundColore Monochrome Background Color bo ooo Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 3 3 New Screen dialog BELTE Pere ee a aa a
136. brand of PLC model of CPU Link port Selecting a proper COM port PLC continuous address interval Setting interval of PLC addresses The default value is recommended 1 Connection n EA Link Type Direct Connection Serial Port Device Server MITSUBISHI E Link Fort PLE contiguous address interval Figure 3 2 Communication setting dialog Figure 3 2 shows a communication port setting dialog Designers can choose appropriate options in this dialog basing on the actual conditions A There are two COM ports in SA 5 7A SA 5 7B SA 5 7C SA 7A SA 8A and SA 10 4A If only one PLC is connected the parameter of COM port depends on the COM port actually used 67 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SA 3 5A and SA 4 3A have only one COM port so you can simply choose COM 1 ai The serial number of connection is an internal parameter that cannot be changed J During configuration you may also set communication properties in the project manager and set other parameters in the communication properties 3 1 3 Screen setting dialog Click Next in Figure 2 45 and a New Screen dialog will pop up In this dialog you can set name and background color The default name of a new screen is the serial number of the screen and the default background color is blue When we create a new screen for the first time SamDraw software will allocate a serial num
137. buds cb cai hoc gate baie R akin Sha ateaeGatoniec 227 S247 COMOL PLOPeliy SCLIN Sheela tcey eee alan taut etal wailed ela A O liam REA EE Ea 233 5 5 APP Dd lieni a rr eRe ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee eee eee er ere 240 w ROT 5 TAN AIO cs trae sateen cpa E arcane ae Br see Arca ogre Rana A Ahonen RANA 250 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 6 1 alll OM INS SIMU APIO Ms shscsuaasidassretd delve nes alcnsuaind domain a a a Setscuatd Con iteaabessmeosies 250 6 2 Omines imala Oena A tadlne cand taeda E E E E E faded 257 de Oy Er SCDE a cee a ee NE RE CeO CAT IO WOE On ODT ere nT REO NN OPTERON NOE 259 deli Sete Of COMMUNICAUON SCIEN sires aie cee eae eke anaes euch ieee 259 T2 SIN A EE E E E E E TE EEE EEE cantar eageeea nes 260 Tak Parameter Seine OF tOuCW SCT enre A AT EA E NE mes 260 ke TIMESA ceria e E A EN 262 TaS PRECECONTO larei a E mE A E 263 DZ MOCK E E E EEA E EA nsec EE ES E A satan aac om Gist 264 T EEO 61 ee a E aa 266 PLOs ESPN MOE OU Cgc oleate E T T O A 267 Ve E C LES a AE A ree ee re ee 269 7 4 WV INOW cecuri a ER a EA E E A am 270 Ta H EOre ali ala CO C O r E E NRE A AE EEO eee Suemeuse Rese 271 7 6 A e E n A E A E 274 ok Disitalalarin 106 ones T es ae a ae dee 274 Loz Analog alarn NOS cai Salada clearest ere eeitioe wecaacid name ea sea sohe dd a ciamadles raacic neneaa capamce ae beniaaetesctanmaduenmenctecteite 278 Tel Alarnrois pla y eono Seas a E E E E E tenets 280 7 8 Recipe c
138. but the touch screen remains working normally To turn on the background light you only need to touch any position on the touch screen 2 Confirm alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to confirm alarm Then you can confirm chosen alarm contents by touching this button on the touch screen 3 Restart Used to set the function of the Function Button to restart Then you can restart the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen 4 Enter touch screen setting mode Used to set the function of the Function Button to enter touch screen setting mode Then you can enter touch screen setting mode to set time password and some other parameters of the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen 5 Write recipe to PLC Used to set the function of the Function Button to write recipe to PLC Then you can write the recipe parameters saved in the current screen to corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write addresses set by designers during recipe setting of PLC or other connected devices by touching this button on the touch screen 6 Read recipe from PLC Used to set the function of the Function Button to read recipe from PLC Then you can read the recipe parameters saved in corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write addresses set by designers during recipe setting of PLC or other connected devices to the touch screen by t
139. by means of the fine tuning button or direct typing in In Text options you can choose whether to display text and can change the maximum and minimum value of the scale the Font Size and the Fractional Digits of the scale gt After modifying the scale properties click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become R Move the mouse to a position where the scale will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking 108 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 again The system will automatically draw a scale See Figure 4 48 Figure 4 48 An example of a scale drawn gt A scale drawn following the above steps is as shown in the first left scale in the figure above If you want to change it to the form of the second left scale in the figure above first choose the scale move the mouse to one of the height sides press down the left key and drag the mouse when the mouse becomes and have the mouse pass through the other height side To change the scale to the right forms in the figure above perform Free Rotation for it 4 3 13 Open library Choose Open Library command in Draw menu or click Open Library command button in the tool buttons and then a Library List dialog will pop up See Figure 4 49 Systems Library 5 Sutton Librari Bet tom Hitomi Nyt fon Disk tant Fiettons Bi
140. ce in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC of S7 200 series includes S7_21X S7_22X 200cn series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection SIEMENS 57 200 WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 334 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA_S200 2 Software setting Set PLC communication protocol to be PPI PLC device address is defaulted to be 2 The communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen Detailed settings refer to the relevant manual of SIEMANS The recommended communication parameters are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS485 Comiat ss Baud rate 9600 mse O Data bit length 335 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Even PLC address 2 Operational address range 0 5119 Vdddd Data register VB 0 5119 read write V_Bdd 0 Data bit dd indicates decimal o indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PL
141. ce is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 355 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 16 Connection between TECHWAYSON V80 series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from TECHWAYSON V80 series by Samkoon series touch screen It uses standard MODBUS RTU protocol It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of TECHWAYSON V80 series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC includes V80 series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen VY Connect with PLC 232 programming port through communication cable 356 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA DWS 2 Software setting PLC communication mode must be RTU mode and the station address is consistent with that of touch screen Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of TECHW
142. color can be changed through the Border Color option below For example If the Data Type chosen by the user is 16 digit positive integer then the control can read continuously three data from the monitored address according to the address rule of the PLC which respectively indicates X coordinate of circle center Y coordinate of circle center and radius of the circle If the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW2 and LW3 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the circle center The value of LW2 is the Y coordinate of the circle center The value of LW3 is the radius of the circle The touch screen will read from three addresses no matter whether Center and or Radius option is checked and the meanings of these addresses remain the same For example if only Radius is chosen and the monitored address is LW1 then the value of LW3 controls the radius of the circle If the Data Type chosen by the user is 32 digit positive integer and the monitored address is LW1 then the values of LW1 LW3 and LW5 will be read respectively with the following meanings The value of LW1 is the X coordinate of the circle center The value of LW3 is the Y coordinate of the circle center The value of LW5 is the radius of the circle Thus if the chosen Data Type is 32 digit positive integer the control can read three data from the monitored address adding 2 to
143. creen operations The dialog box of window attribute setting is as shown in figure 7 12 Hew Findor Height and width Display in middle Display in Title Close button Background color Window Hame Windowd Width 240 Height 100 Sal Display in Middle Display in w Title v Close Button Caption BGColor M Figure 7 12 Dialog box of Window attribute Respectively used to set the height and width of window The popped up window displays in the middle of HMI When the option Display in is selected the window displays in the location with X coordinate and Y coordinate points set by user The origin of coordinates is upper left corner of HMI screen Select the option Title and enter title name in column Title Name to pop up a window with title bar Whether the window has button for closing Used to change the background color of window 271 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 7 5 Historical Data Collector Historical Data Collector is used together with Historical Record Displayer in toolbar The former one is mainly used for parameter setting and the latter one is used to display the accessed historical data If no new Historical Data Collector has been established you can create a new one just like creating a new screen i e click Historical Data Collector with right key and select Add Historical Data
144. creens Adopt defaults in general PLC address 51 It 1s valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Timeout The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates that the touch screen pops up communication failure without corresponding recovery within 2 seconds Generally the defaults are adopted Address standard PLC It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Select Hollysys and LM series PLC in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly Note the parameter in PLC address is 51 which can not be changed at random and determined according to the PLC connection Please refer to Hollysys programming manual Operational address range Operational address is determined when a Hollysys LM series PLC is connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs an extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of Hollysys LM series PLC MX0 0 read write MX ddd o M stora
145. d by user 7 2 6 HMI protect The main function of HMI protect users can set that HMI can be used normally within a time limit if the time set by user is exceeded HMI will skip to the designated screen set by user in advance making HMI cannot be used again If you want to reuse the HMI users have to enter the correct unlock password through the function HMI Unlock in function button Double click the option HMI Protect in Project Manager to pop up the dialog box as shown in figure 7 10 HEI Protect Use HMI Protect Function The Total Number of Password levyel D neon 8 oon Preferences setting Time Limit 2009 04 01 12 00 00 Prompt screen v Screen Unlock Password p o Set the protection feature you need AN this password to unlock the protection use furction button to input unlock password Figure 7 10 Dialog box of HMI protect Take an example to describe the use method of this function gt Select Use HMI Protect Function gt Suppose the Total Number of Password level is set to 3 in the dialog box then click 1 268 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 suppose to be 2009 04 01 enter application time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 button icon and select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppo
146. d to display system time Click Time Display control icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 83 will appear 151 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Time Display ID noonoo Fir Color Forder Color Eis Color Pattern Esnia Format m Font General Font Font Size Text Color ee Alignment O Left Center Right Figure 4 83 Time Display dialog l Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Format Format of time display including two formats that is HH MM hour minute HH MM SS hour minute second Font Here you can choose common font or digital font Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs Text color Here you can change the color of the time display text Alignment Here you can have the time displayed on left side on right side or in the middle gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become N Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 132 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 4 14 Date display Date Display control is mainly used to display system date Click Date Display control icon BS in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 84 will appear Date Display Date Display ID
147. date time and message of each alarm Dynamic alarm bar Used to create in the current screen an alarm bar that can display alarm message and move left or right Historic alarm dialog Used to create in the current screen a historical alarm box control to display the date time and message of each alarm Graphics move Used to create in the current screen a graph display box whose picture state and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device Meter Used to create in the current screen a meter to monitor the change in the value of single address of the connected device Multi state switch Used to create in the current screen a multi state button to monitor change in the value of single address of the connected device by means of state change Historic record display Used to create in the current screen a display control to display the message saved by the historical record collector Message display Used to create in the current screen a display control to display preset messages Screen menu Screen menu consists of commands used for screen operation including New Screen N Screen Properties P and Delete Screen D See Figure 2 29 47 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Setting E Dow Screen FI Hew Screen Screen Properties FJ Delete Screen D Figure 2 29 Screen menu New screen Used to c
148. ddd Elapsed value of timer 0 255 read write C Vddd Elapsed value of counter ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not 5 The operation control switch is ON or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 401 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 402 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 29 Connection between Allen Bradley AB PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of Allen Bradley AB series PLC registers through Allen Bradley DF1 protocol by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming
149. ding Space acro Figure 4 74 Numeric Entry dialog 142 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern i Refer to Numeric Display control for use of Alignment Justification Total Digits and Fractional Digits To reset the contents and properties of Numeric Entry you can double click the Numeric Entry dialog When this control is executed in HMI a keyboard will pop up on the screen for users to enter the data See Figure 4 75 Figure 4 75 Number entering keyboard When 32 digit data type is chosen for Numeric Display the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address E Fractional digits Setting of this parameter will impact the data display effect If the data type chosen is 16 32 digit positive integer or 16 32 digit integer the number displayed will be the return number subject to decimal point left movement by the number of digits as set in this parameter For example if the return number is 212 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will
150. dynamic assignment by inputting function and assignment statement The numerical array can not be overall assigned input or output with assignment statement but assigned for array element one by one with do statement 208 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 2 C Language Programming Preliminary 5 2 1 Statement of C program The execution part of C program is constituted by statements and the program function 1s also realized by execution statement C statement is classified into five categories 1 Expression statement 2 Control statement 3 Compound statement 4 Null statement 1 Expression statement Expression statement consists of expression and semicolon Its general form is expression Execution of expression statement is to compute the expression value For example x y z assignment statement y z operate statement with addition but the result is not kept It has no actual significance 1 Increment statement 1 value increases 1 2 Control statement Control statement is to control the program process so as to realize various structures of program It is composed of special statement delimiter There are nine control statements in C language which can be classified into three kinds 1 Conditional judgment statement if statement switch statement 2 Looping execution statement do while statement while statement for statement 3 Go to statement break statement go to stat
151. e HMI and hope HMI still can operate other screens user can add one function button in this screen screen 1 and select the function Unlock HMI When the time limit of level 1 HMI protect is reached click the function button and enter the unlock password of level 1 protect in the popped up password entering box Here the unlock password is 1111 HMI can be used normally when level 1 HMI password is unlocked Suppose the current time is 2009 04 05 12 00 00 which has reached to the set level 2 HMI protect Therefore HMI will automatically adjust to set HMI protect screen screen 2 Like previous operation users have to use function button select Unlock HMI and enter level 2 protect password 2222 Only in this way the HMI can be used normally Therefore we set level 3 HMI protect here As above when the time is 2009 04 10 12 00 00 to ensure the normal use of HMI users still have to use function button select Unlock HMP and enter level 3 protect password 3333 When password of 3 levels has been unlocked HMI protection is invalid and HMI can be used normally Examples are taken above to describe the operation of HMI protect function Operation for setting 269 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 of different password levels is similar Users can refer to above descriptions 7 3 Screen Screen operation means to operate page Create a new screen operation as shown in f
152. e counter count value and T represents the address of the timer count value For S7 200 series of Siemens PLCs I represents the address of the input point Q represents the address of the output point M represent the address of the intermediate relay and V represents the address of the data register See Figure 4 55 Address Entry Left is MITSUBISHI ZF address input Right is the SIEMENS H address input Figure 4 55 Thus you can write the current state of the bit button into the address basing on the corresponding address symbols of the PLCs or other connected device used In other words when the Bit Button is at O OFF state the value of the write or displayed address is 0 OFF when the control is at 1 ON state the value of the write or displayed address is 1 ON Monitor If this option is checked a Monitor Address will appear indicating this Bit Button can be used to monitor the state change of the value of Monitor Address When the value of the monitored address is 1 ON the bit button presents 1 ON state when the value of the monitored address is 0 OFF the bit button presents 0 OFF state When Monitor is chosen the monitored address can be different from the write address For example when Set ON function is chosen for this bit button the write address can be set to 1 ON by touching the button However if the current state of the monitored address is 0 OFF then this bit button presents 0 OFF state Generally we
153. e driver is used to read and write the data or state of Hitachi EH series PLC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of Hitachi EH series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with Hitachi EH series PLC How to establish connection hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen Hitachi PLC programming port RS232 port RS232 communication port D female connector 8 pin crystal head 9 pin female 8 pin crystal head aam pa a a a eal jc Software setting of SamDraw3 2 configuration screen edition 370 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model Hitachi EH Select the corresponding PLC for different models At present series Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports Hitachi EH series PLC Communication Adopt standard RS232 serial communication Port type Baud rate Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Data bit Samkoon SA serie
154. e easily this chapter will not introduce syntax and basic knowledge in details to review the relevant basis of different macros but emphasize the establishment and usage of macros by instances This chapter will explain basic C Language briefly relevant usage of macroinstruction and considerations 194 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 1 Introduction to C Language 5 1 1 Data type of C language 1 Integer Integer includes integer constant and integer variable The integral constant is the integer constant In C language there are three kinds of integer constant octal hexadecimal and decimal Integer constant l Octal integer constant The octal integer constant must begin with 0 That is to say O is the prefix of octal integer constant Its value is 0 7 Octal constant is usually unsigned The followings are the legal octal 015 decimal 13 0101 decimal 65 0177777 decimal 65535 The followings are the illegal octal 256 without prefix 0 03A2 contained non octal codes 0127 with negative sign Hexadecimal integer constant The hexadecimal integer constant is prefixed with 0X or ox Its value is 0 9 A F or a f The followings are the legal hexadecimal OX2A decimal 42 0XAO0 decimal 160 OXFFFF decimal 65535 The followings are the illegal hexadecimal 5A without prefix 0X 0X3H contained non hexadecimal codes Decimal integer constant The octal intege
155. e external input data by numeral entry display control then trigger ADDSUM macro by pressing button and display the execution result through numeral entry display control Detailed operations are shown as following Step 1 lt Create a macro gt RE 2a ma and pop up the dialog box as shown in Figure 5 7 Macro Editor Click the circled icon macro shortcut button in the toolbar Step 2 lt Create macro Init gt Click new add button in the window of macro editor and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 8 Macro Editor Input tag name Init in the edition box tag name and the source program code as shown in Figure 5 9 code edition of macro compiler 228 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bacro Editor Compile success ee 7 Unfinished Compile oo lt Figure 5 7 Macro Editor 229 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bacro Compiler include Macroinit nh void Macro_main 4 Data Typa Tag name FLO HO Address Addross Information Output Window Function i E j Close Figure 5 8 Macro Compiler P Macro name is composed with Arabic numerals 0 9 English characters a z A Z and underscore _ As shown in Figure 5 9 Macro Compiler input the contents in the following circle 230 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manu
156. e outline dimension is 202x144x40 and the installing opening dimension is 192x138 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 202 mm ww Stl The back Installation opening size Figure 1 9 Installing dimensions of SA 5 7D SA 5 7E SA 5 7F Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Installing dimension of SA 4 3A Figure 1 5 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 4 3A The outline dimension is 138x86x39 and the installing opening dimension is 131x79 Installation opening size Figure 1 5 Installing dimensions of SA 4 3 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 44 Installing dimension of SA 3 5A Figure 1 6 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 3 5A The outline dimension is 96x81x46 and the installing opening dimension is 92x77 The back Installation opening size Figure 1 6 Installing dimensions of SA 3 5 1 4 Structure of the touch screen The overall structure of Samkoon SA series touch screen consists of display area indicator light power supply and communication interfaces The colors of all models of touch screens are designed according to relevant industrial standards with high dirtying resistance and being suitable for use under bad conditions of plants Indicator lights are equipped on the front panel to indicate equipment failure The power supply module and the communications interfaces are all located a
157. e picture state and position can change along with the change in the values of several continuous addresses of the connected device TE 5 c6 99 i Corresponding to Meter command used to create in the current screen a meter to monitor the change in the value of single address of the connected device display control to display the message saved by the historical record collector ss Corresponding to Message display command used to create in the current screen a display Corresponding to Historic record display command used to create in the current screen a control to display preset messages 59 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ba Corresponding to Multi state switch command used to create in the current screen a multi state button to execute several functions in one button l Corresponding to Flow block command used to create a flow simulation control in the current screen sE El Corresponding to Timer command used to create in the current screen a macro timer to control execution of macros SamDraw s Project Manager window The Project Manager window of SamDraw is located below the tool bar on the left of the interface of the configuration software It can be used to set parameters for the touch screen including Link Setting Screen Window Historical Data Logger Alarm Log and Recipe In detail Link includes L
158. e service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly If changes are needed it should be confirmed depending on PLC connection Please refer to YOKOGAWA PLC programming manual 386 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Operational address range Operational address is determined when a YOKOGAWA FA series PLC is connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs an extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of YOKOGAWA FA series PLC Take FA M3 as an example w w o eoe Maal io ee fewe a oo foo wi eme Daw fo setae fone mas vo at amie vais pe feo se domi zap o ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates the octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again 387 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual
159. e top layer of all the graph objects in the current screen Thus the parts of other graphs intersected with this graph will be covered by this graph Figure 4 7 shows a contrast before and after such moving biect before the forward Object moved forward after Figure 4 7 Contrast before and after moving object forward gt Move object backward This command is used to move the chosen object to the bottom layer of all the graph objects in the current screen Thus the part of this graph intersected with other graphs will be covered by other graphs Figure 4 8 shows a contrast before and after such moving 84 User Manual V3 3 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software braa ee ee ee ee ee Object before back Object after back Figure 4 8 Contrast before and after moving object backward gt Move object one layer forward This command is used to move the chosen object to an upper layer over the graph object intersected with it Thus the parts of other graphs intersected with this graph will be covered by this graph Figure 4 9 shows a contrast before and after such moving Execution a layer of two Object moved forward a Execution of a times the forward layer of former forward again Figure 4 9 Contrast before and after moving object one layer forward gt Move object one layer backward This command is used to move the chosen object to a lower layer than the graph object intersected with it
160. ecessary process before downloading Do save the configuration before compiling or the compiling process cannot be started See Figure 3 11 If you change the screen configuration after compiling you need to compile it again Frompt F s j Please save the file before compiling Figure 3 11 Compiling reminder Finally choose USB download command in the Download menu Alternatively you can also directly choose Compile Download command in the Download menu to complete both compiling and downloading After that a dialog as shown in Figure 3 12 will pop up 73 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Download Password Clesr History Alarm Log M Clear History Date Log F Download Recipe Start the Program Screen After Download finish Figure 3 12 Download dialog Click Download then the progress bar in the middle will show the downloading progress After completion of downloading a window will pop up to prompt that the USB downloading has been completed Click OK to complete the process See Figure 3 13 beasna ai ate ale een A ee ie oe oe eo ee oe ee ee oe ee oe oe eee oe ee oe ee oe ee oe oe ene oo oe ae ne ne oe oe oe ae ce oe oe ae ae oe oe ea le ae ee oe oe ae ee Download Trying connect to HMI Connecti HAI success Downloading system parameters Downloading the control data of screen The Data of 000 Screan The Data of O01 Screen The Data of O02 Ser
161. ected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 312 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 4 Connection between VIGOR series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write PLC series device from VIGOR by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of VIGOR PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC of VIGOR includes VH VB and M series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port VIGOR all J Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable RS232 Samkoon SA series touch screen Communication cable type CA VIGOR 1 313 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Software setting The communication parameter of PLC should be consistent with that of touch screen Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of VIGOR PLC The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit
162. ectrum area on the right and then drag the mouse to adjust the required color area Then you may also drag the mouse in the rectangular box on the right to finalize the color At last click Add to self defined colors on the right bottom and then click OK to complete color selection Alternatively you may also enter the composition values of the three primary colors in the boxes above the Add to self defined colors button to get a self defined color The value of each primary color can be from 0 to 255 Thus there are totally 255x255x255 colors available for selection After color selection click OK on the left bottom to complete color selection process 4 3 1 Line Choose Line command in Draw menu or click Line command button N in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw lines in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically When the mouse is moved to a target position of the other end of the line left 94 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 click or right click the mouse once So far a line
163. ed to assemble two or more graph objects in the current screen to a whole graph object The objects to be assembled may be graphs drawn by designers or users or graphs from picture library of the system or other controls such as alarm control and trend chart After assembling the original properties of the graph elements will not be kept An assembled object graph or control is a whole image and can be saved as library control for future use helping to save much time of the users Disassemble command is used to disassemble a graph assembled using Assemble command to the original elements After disassembling the 82 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 original properties of the elements can be recovered Disassemble command is a reverse command of Assemble command The assembling steps are as follows gt First choose the graph objects to be assembled then press Assemble command in the Edit menu or a button in the tool bar or call the right click menu and choose Assemble command in the Assemble option Figure 4 5 shows the contrast before and after assembling F s oo f p Combination before After combination Figure 4 5 Contrast before and after assembling The disassembling steps are as follows gt Choose a graph object assembled using Assemble command and then choose Disassemble command in the Edit menu or Disassemble command in the tool button or call t
164. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaasseseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeees 158 ses Ea Sa ee ee Pu ym eT ee eC eT OY Oe eee eT ee 158 AS Trend Ro een ee cement eee meee eee nena Senet Te ene See Dene Nn Se ene NR eee eee 159 A AY rend Cha eeu a a a a a a a 164 ASA Dynan oele s a RAA AE D E E E E 165 Eoo Dae e a E E Seen aetna ubuattinamnecmrnWosetecnmorsies 168 4 5 6 Alarm COTO yeah eh oh woh ao eh a eh a eh ad eh oo Sh ad 170 AO Dynamic alarni Galestar a a diee dgaeetantedustadeaseaces 172 ASS Historncalarni display casein a a a a 174 LS ATAPI O VE rean a E EAE O O E N O E 174 ASO 1 Co CR eG oe eee 176 ASL Historie TeCOrd dISPIAY 2ia2 uet raid aetadievatndtaadenth aie enakadetasiwalia Wau iededeile 179 ADD Message display oeenn eanna T E Aosta E OO N TAE E EE END 180 A Dele ON OE a a a a a eon tebansuaawiaheon 181 ASA A TE eiae E A A A A R 183 Ako DATIS O so cco cates el coca saci li ota el accel accel teh ld cence ate claacondeaseaea 185 A 5 16 Multifunction DUO Mesiasen denii anen deii aaa eT aaa ea ea eaa aaan 187 4 6 Operanon OF Sali ray COnTo lS Jereo E a R 189 3s MaC 0 6 earn E eC ere eee 193 5 1 Introduction to language oeus aee N Aaa N AEA Eaa ESE AEE AE SEART 194 Sil Data Type Or Clan Cua oE ea castrate ami E E EE T AETA 194 5 1 2 Initial value of variable and type CONVETSION ccssseesssssseeecceceeeeceeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 200 Sb WasiGOperatOrialic CxpresSiOm 4 a55 4hieee ioe es eel ites eee ol oil i Gee tre 2
165. eens Downloading screen information 000 Sereent O01 Sereen O02 Screens Downloading communication information _ Downloading other information Dowrloead Finish Sam Dr aw Figure 3 13 Downloading completed 74 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Then connect the touch screen with PLC and observe in the touch screen whether the configuration results are correct Refer to Wiring part for connection between PC PLC and HMI E Do not disconnect the power supply of the touch screen or PC or the data cable during data transfer and do not carry out other operations otherwise the data transfer may be adversely impacted J Please install USB driver well before downloading otherwise HMI cannot be connected with PC and thus the downloading cannot be completed Figure 3 14 USB driver prompt al Ifa dialog as shown in Figure 3 14 appears it indicates that the PC cannot identify the touch screen In this case you can check whether the USB driver has been installed Connect the PC with the touch screen power on the touch screen and search for a USB driver named Samkoon HMI Tech Corp in My Computer Properties Hardware Device Manager General Serial Bus Controller of Windows See Figure 3 15 You may also try removing and plugging USB cable repeatedly to check whether the PC can identify the HMI 1D Shenzhen Samkoon s
166. em will automatically draw a rectangular cell that is a text box gt To modify or re input the words of the text double click the words and type in new words with keyboard Enter key can be used to change a line during such inputting gt To change the size of the background box of the text cell first choose the text cell move the mouse to the edge of the text box press down the left key and drag the mouse when it becomes orf or and finally release the key at appropriate position Changing width of text cell Changing height of text cell w Changing both width and height of text cell 4 3 11 Table graph 106 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Choose Table command in Draw menu or click Table command button dad in the tool buttons and then a Table dialog will pop up See Figure 4 45 Bir Calor O Border Cull Hovritonial Booher Vertical Berher Grid Vertical Horicontal Fattern Color teed _ xa _ Figure 4 45 Table dialog gt In the Table dialog as shown in the figure above SamDraw provides options such as background color display of border cell options and grid options In Cell options number of cells and be adjusted either by clicking the fine tuning button or directly typing in a number In Grid options you can choose whether to display the vertical horizontal lines and change the grid pattern and color gt After modify
167. ement continue statement return statement 3 Null statement The statement with semicolon only is called null statement Null statement executes nothing In the program null statement can be the null loop body Take an example of while getchar n For this statement if the character input from keyboard is not Enter it requires re input Here the loop body is null statement 4 Assignment statement 209 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Assignment statement consists of assignment expression and semicolon Its general form 1s variable expression Its functions and features are same to that of assignment expression It 1s one of the most popular statements in the program There are some points to be noted in the usage of assignment statement nom 1 As the expression on the right of assignment sign can be an assignment expression the following form Variable variable expression 1s established then the nestification 1s formed Its expanded expression is Variable Variable Expression For example a b c d e 5 according to the right associativity of assignment operator it 1s equivalent to e 5 actually d e c d b c a b 2 Pay attention to the difference between assigning initial value and statement for variable in the variable declaration Assigning initial value to variable is a part of variable declaration The variable with initial value assignment should be spaced w
168. en ion module 2 Wiring diagram 323 S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 The communication port of CPU unit is connected to touch screen V V The OMRON PLC with standard serial port connects with following cables o O00 o 000 E fJOOOO 0 rOooO00O 0 Communication cable type CB OMRON232 1 Communication cables CPM1 CIF01 CLQOOHW COMO02 03 04 05 06 are connected with touch screen 9DIND female connector Communication cable type CB OMRON232_1 Communication cables C200H LK201 3G2A6 LK201 are connected with touch screen 324 S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 0000 P A 0000 fe 0000 fe 0000 Communication cable type CB OMRON232 1 Communication cable CPM1 CIF11 is connected with touch screen Samkoon touch screen COM1 or COM2 CPM 1 CIFII RS422 Port DB9 pin female ti 00 fo DINDfemale connector O OO ad O O Communication cable type CA OMRON 1 Communication cables C200H LK202 3G2A6 LK202 are connected with touch screen 325 User Manual V3 3 henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software S LK202 Adapter Samkoon touch screen COM1 or COM2 DB9 pin female RS422 Port logoo Fa w Communication cable type CA OMRON 2 Communication cables C200HW COM03 06 RS422 are connected with touch screen C
169. en you can find the converted file from the stored path 2 Choose Upload historical data to upload the historical data from HMI to hard disk Upload Historical Data Upload Port Stored Path File Hame Start Upload Stored path Click Browse to choose the path where the uploaded file will be saved File name Set a name for the uploaded file The uploaded file is in the format of CSV that is comma separator file which can be opened and edited with Excel Click OK to start uploading The file will be saved to the set path K The uploaded historical data should be 8M at most 79 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Guide on configuration with SamDraw This chapter introduces in detail the configuration methods using SamDraw software 4 1 SamDraw screen operation 4 1 1 Newscreen New Screen command is used to create a new screen in the current project The steps to create a new screen are so simple that even beginners can complete easily These steps are as follows 1 Choose New Screen command in the Screen menu or click a in the tool bar or right click the Screen in the Project Manager and then click Add Screen in the right click menu See Figure 4 1 Peet Add Screen DDL Sereen O02 Screens Figure 4 1 Screen option 2 In the New Screen pop up dialog set the name and background color of the screen to be created
170. enient in some circumstances 5 2 7 continue statement Continue statement is used in loop body only Its general form 1s continue 218 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Semanteme finish this loop and not execute the other statement behind continue statement in the loop body any more turn to judge and execute the next loop condition Pay attention this statement only ends the loop on this layer and will not exit the loop 219 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Section summary l From the execution process the program is basically classified into three basic structures sequence structure branch structure and loop structure The most basic unit in program execution is statement There are five kinds of statements in C language 1 Expression statement any expression and semicolon forms the expression statement The general expression statement is assignment statement 2 Function call statement the function call and semicolon constitutes the function call Statement 3 Control statement it is used for control program process and composed of special statement delimiter and required expression It mainly includes conditional judgment execution statement loop execution statement go to statement etc 4 Compound statement it is composed by several statements included in Compound statement is regarded as single statement It can be
171. eparated in application 3 The associative direction of conditional operator is from right to left 5 2 3 switch statement C language provides another switch statement for selection of multiple branches Its general form 1S switch expression case constant expression 1 statement 1 case constant expression 2 statement 2 case constant expression n statement n default statement n l j Semanteme calculate the expression value and compare with the subsequent constant expression value one by one When the expression value is equal to a constant expression value the subsequent statement is executed Then judgment is not made Continue the statement behind all case If the expression value is different from the constant expression behind case it will execute the statement behind default There are several points to be noted in switch statement 1 All constant expression values behind case must be different otherwise there will be mistake 2 Several statements are allowed behind case and they can not be bracketed with 3 The sequence of case and default clauses may be changed and will not affect the program execution 4 Default clause may be omitted 5 2 4 Loop structure program The loop structure is an important structure of program When the given condition is satisfied one program segment is executed repeatedly until the condition is unsatisfied The given condition is called loop condition and the p
172. eration including And amp amp Or and Not Bit operation operator The data for operation is taken as binary bit including bit and amp bit or bit not bit or left shift lt lt and right shift gt gt Assignment operator It is used for assignment operation including simple assignment composite arithmetic assignment and composite bit operation assignment amp gt gt lt lt Conditional operator This is a ternary operator for conditional evaluation Comma operator It is used for combining several expressions to one expression _ Pointer operator It is used for two operations as content of and address of amp S1ze of operator It is used for size of operation of data 203 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 Special operator It includes bracket subscript etc 5 1 4 One dimensional array In the program design the array organizes several variables with same category in ordered form for convenience The set containing data elements with the same category in order is called array In C language the array belongs to construction data One array can be split into several array elements These array elements are either basic data or construction data Therefore the array can be classified into numerical array character array pointer array structure array according to the category of
173. erval and Position of the text to get beautiful text 3 Picture Click Picture tab in the Multi state lamp property dialog and then a property setting dialog as shown in Figure 4 68 will appear 134 S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software Kultistate Lamp im General Text Picture Visibility User Manual V3 3 Bitmap elements s 0 1 2 Attribute Border Interval o Picture File O Library lement Je Delete Ficture Fit to Object Fosition Figure 4 68 Picture tab of Multi state Lamp This tab is mainly used to load pictures for different states By default the picture for each state is void and you can change the picture to be displayed according to actual needs The steps are as follows Choose the state to be modified in the list choose whether the required picture is from system library or saved in Windows click button EE and add a picture from the system library or a directory of Windows Then you can see pictures corresponding to different states when you click the states in the list In addition you can also choose Fit to Object option If this option is not checked you can change the border interval and position of the picture in the control to beautify the control l Refer to the introduction of Bit Button for Visibility tab l Ik gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mo
174. esent Samkoon SA series touch screens have the following models SA 12 1A 800x600 12 1 SA 10 4A 800x600 10 4 SA 10 4B 640x480 10 4 SA 10 2A 800x480 10 2 SA 8A 640x480 8 0 SA 8B 800x600 8 0 SA 7A 800x480 7 0 SA 7B 800x480 7 0 SA 5 7A 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7B 640x480 5 7 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SA 5 7C 320x234 5 7 SA 5 7D 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7E 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7F 320x234 5 7 SA 4 3A 480x272 4 3 SA 3 5A 320x234 3 5 SA 12 1A 800x600 12 1 The length width ratio of SA 12 1A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SA 10 4A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SA 10 4B is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SA 10 4B is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SA 10 2A is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 800x480 The length width ratio of SA 8A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SA 8B is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 800x600 The length width ratio of SA 7A and SA 7B is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 800x480 The length width ratio of SA 5 7A and SA 5 7D is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 digital clarity The length width ratio of SA 5 7A and SA 5 7E is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 640x480 The length width ratio of SA 5 7C and SA 5 7F is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 320x234 The length width
175. et aes gd SRE MAT Ee AD eee eee See 2885 958 9 Frejece Manager J kt etiing IML purawter sedting y FAI Sisilya ES FLC Comtral JT Leck E Frateckien IME Feoheztios Sera J 000 alts 0 Fae Che fi Ci a ae 0 clo Jez A tize pa jy Picteri eal Tala ESEA gt it Cacrdinatex Left Figure 6 7 Edited project vV Click Save to save the project Then select Off line Simulation in option Download in menu bar to pop up a screen as shown in figure 6 2 The introduction of off line simulation example ends 6 2 On line Simulation If you have no SA series HMI you can use on line simulation to realize communication through personal computer plc and other related devices When using this function the personal computer simulates the operation status of touch screen which can debug the correctness of your configuration software and carry out related test if touch screen has fault For configuration 258 fe ILE F Site fidth BE ai OS z He Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 operation of on line simulation please refer to that of off line simulation Connection with plc is needed for on line simulation At the time of operating on line simulation please ensure that the cable connected with plc and computer can perform normal communication The service time of online simulation function is 30 minutes It will
176. evices for Samkoon SA Series Touch Screen 9 1 Connection mode of One device with multiple screens between Samkoon SA series touch screen and PLC Samkoon SA series touch screen can connect with PLC in the form of one device with multiple screens through MODBUS communication protocol All touch screens connect with each other one by one The first screen 1s connected with PLC You can set all touch screens to be slave station and PLC to be primary station Double click com1 connection in project manager to pop up attribute setting window of communication port In option General of this window select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Slave in right area Alternatively set the first touch screen connected with PLC to be primary station and other screens and PLC to be salve station Therefore when setting attribute of communication port for first touch screen it is necessary to select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Master in right area Besides it is required to change mode to expanded mode in option Parameter of this window and distribute address of touch screen In this way the touch screen as slave station also can obtain PLC data through the first screen even if they are not directly connected with PLC For both above methods only primary station can communicate with slave station Salve stations cannot communicate with each other m When PLC is primary station and all touch sc
177. f AND operation amp amp are true the results are true otherwise they are false For example 5 gt 0 amp amp 4 gt 2 As 5 gt 0 is true and 4 gt 2 is true the corresponding result is true 211 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 When one of two values involved in OR operation is true the result 1s true When two values are false the result is false Take an example of 5 gt 0 5 gt 8 As 5 gt 0 is true the corresponding result is true 3 When the NOT operation involved in operation is true the result is false when the involved operation 1s false the result is true For example the result of 5 gt 0 is false In the logical operation value of C programming it represents true with 1 and represents false with 0 Vice versa when judging a value is true or false 0 represents false and the non zero data represents true For example as 5 and 3 are non zero the value of 5 amp amp 3 is true i e 1 Another example the value of 5 0 is true e 1 The general form of logical expression is Expression Logical operator Expression Wherein the expression can be logical expression as well which forms nestification Take the a amp amp b amp amp c as an instance The above expression can be written to a amp amp b amp amp c according to the left associativity of logical operator The value of logical expression is the final value of vario
178. f all manufacturers Safety issues In this Manual safety considerations are divided into Danger and Caution Danger Mis operation may lead to accidents and cause death or serious injury Caution Mis operation may lead to accidents and cause middle or minor injury However issues marked as Caution may also cause serious accidents in some cases So please abide by these instructions carefully Warning Before installation dismounting wiring maintenance or testing please switch off the power to prevent electric shock mis operation or failure Please set external emergency stop loop and interlock device for the touch screen Otherwise failure of the touch screen may cause mechanical damage or accidents When the power is on do not touch live parts such as the terminals or electric shock may be caused Caution Do not use items that have been damaged or deformed at the time of unpacking or failure or mis operation may be caused Prevent the machine from impact such as falling or rolling or product damage and failure may be caused Please store and use the machine under the environment specified in the operation instructions and user manual Storage or use under such adverse environment as high temperature high humidity frost dust corrosive gas oil stain organic solvent lubricant great vibration and shock or it may cause electric shock fire malfunction and the like Please transfer on screen data durin
179. f sub scales whether to display axis whether to display marks and the like In screed edit area press down left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to draw a Meter control See Figure 4 101 for an example of Meter g0 100 Figure 4 101 Choose the Meter graph and then you can move the mouse to any of the 8 small green dots on the graph to change the size of the control or double click the control to modify the properties 179 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 of the Meter al Meter control has fixed width height ratio so when you adjust the size of the control the width and the height change simultaneously Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 11 Historic record display In actual use some data generated by PLC or other connected devices may change all the time such as alarm information Sometimes we need to view some historical data and in SamDraw we can do this using the Historic Data Collector SamDraw provides a collector of historical data and you can enter Historic Data Collector dialog in the Project Manager If the project is a new project you need to right click the Historic Data Collector and choose Add a Historic Data Collector option After that double click it to enter Historic Data Collector dialog Refer to Chapter VI for detailed introduction of the Historic Data Collector Click Historic Record Display but
180. for several graph objects chosen basing on the height and width of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries with the top left coordinates of the graph objects being fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same Height and Width buttons or call the right click menu and click The Same Height and Width command in the Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Height and Width button in the tool option in the right click menu See Figure 4 23 for a contrast before and after such processing 92 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Make same width and height before Make same width and height after Figure 4 22 Contrast before and after The Same Height and Width al Before apply The Same Width The Same Height and The Same Height and Width commands you need to first make sure whether the objects to be processed have been rotated Rotated objects are subjected to change between width and height Application of these commands after rotation has the same effect as rotation after application of these commands 4 3 Drawing basic graphs using SamDraw SamDraw provides many graph commands such as line polygonal line curve arc free line straight connection line curve connection line rectangle circle ellipse polygons text table and scale Now we introduce how to draw basic graphs using these com
181. ftware User Manual V3 3 Address Find With this function you can see the use information of an address including a list of the controls using this address You can double click this information item to choose the control Address Find Enter the Address You Want to Find Hote The Letter Requested Case sensitive Figure 4 115 Address find Enter an address and click Find and then the results will be shown in the information output window Searching for LAO Position Project Manager Data Transport Data TransportSource Address Position Project Manager Data Transport Data Transport Destination Address occurrence s have been found Figure 4 116 Results of address searching Choose a result and double click it to choose the controls using this address Address Table Click Address Table the system will give a list of the addresses used by the current project Double click an address a property setting dialog for the controls using this address will pop up so that you can set the properties quickly and conveniently 192 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Address Screen Name Object Name Address Type Ad Sereeni Bit Button Write Address M5 Sereen Tord Button trite Address Li Sereenl Meter E Monitor Address Lif Sereent Bit Button Write Address LE i a j Display Type QDisplay All Screen Screen Hane Sereent Figure 4 117 Address tab
182. g entering touch screen setting mode writing a recipe to PLC reading a recipe from PLC setting date and time clearing alarm the previous recipe the next recipe saving the current recipe moving alarm upward moving alarm downward paging down alarm paging up alarm adjusting coordinates system parameters changing user level logging off user level touch sound ON OFF alarm sound ON OFF clearing all historical data clearing historical alarm and HMI protection unlocking Bit lamp used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor bit state of single connected device Multi state lamp Used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor word state of several connected devices with continuous addresses Numeric display Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing the value of the monitored address Numeric entry Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box for data entry and showing the value of the monitored address ASCII character display Used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing ASCII character words ASCII character entry Used to draw in the current screen an ASCII character display and entry box for inputting ASCII character words Bar graph Used to insert in the current screen bar graph controls You can use up and down or left right movement of bars to observe the change in the value of the monitored address Time display Used to insert in the current
183. g fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same in the tool Width command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Width button buttons or call the right click menu and click The Same Width command in the Align option in the right click menu See Figure 4 21 for a contrast before and after such processing 91 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Make same width before Make same width after Figure 4 21 Contrast before and after The Same Width gt The Same Height The Same Height command allows designers to set the same height for several graph objects chosen basing on the height of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries without changing the widths of the graph objects and with the top left coordinates of the graph objects being fixed To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click The Same Height or call the right click menu and click The Same Height command in the Align option in the right command in Align option in Edit menu or click The Same Height button in the tool buttons click menu See Figure 4 22 for a contrast before and after such processing Make same height before Make same height after Figure 4 22 Contrast before and after The Same Height gt The Same Height and Width The Same Height and Width command allows designers to set the same height and width
184. g operation only when the safety is ensured Otherwise mechanical damage or failure may be caused by mis operation Do not turn off the power while the software is working communicating with the equipment connected or it may cause data loss machine damage or failure Please use and operate under the software action environment specified in this Manual or it may cause failure or mis action Please confirm reliable and firm connection with communication cable or it may cause failure or mis action Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Contents Ds GNU ANU hice ANN AEN Ah tw ltt lr lla llr lo lg lor ltl cll le sls ht te le ls thle lle lobes l 1 1 Eea ee tat aerate ered eee ee eee ee ee eee l 1 2 Moderand descripti oii arprseraorai ann n E R EERE AANER R l 1 3 Producir dinie nio Densi a A S A Man nce E A E A NTE MC ean nce nT 3 1 4 SUCC OLNE TOUCH SORE C iarsna a E E A A 12 EAL PO WES yenn T A Pas ek Seca eh se T A TE 13 E2 PONDAN konii a T A AE R E 13 KAS COMMUMICAL OM IML AC ES aen eN EEUE EEUE E E 13 LAA Operation indicar Mehis a lig LSD ate ald Gabbe abseil 14 1 5 Prneipleor the toch Sereia E E 14 B FR rim OCU Ce st sciccusatanastontasacnsaddontontdsasuund E EES 15 k32 TOUCH SCFEEM CISPIAY MAO UNC stadia scotia totes dottiees dette a todgai a a aaae 15 LSS COMMA Ot US ec wee Seance see E T aetna ela we ata hens 15 See Memon modile neon tote le chalet eles Acta ioe seeliee Mea sAedaa fetes
185. ge MO M99 MX8191 7 Is self diagnosis data area for read only M300 MW MWO MW38191 read write M2 dddd A a name NBOU Power Others are 376 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 377 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 22 Connection between ALTEC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of ALTEC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication c
186. gits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed Total digits The sum of the number of integer digits and fractional digits If the integer length of the number to be displayed is longer than the set value the integer length displayed will be the integer length of the actual number For example if the return number is 2123 the data length is 2 and the number fractional digits are 1 then 212 3 will be displayed Advanced tab of Numeric Display has powerful functions including Scaling and Range Display 139 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 See Figure 4 71 Hameric Display General Advanced Visibility Sealing irain l Offset E Low Limit High Limit High Color Text Color BG Color i BG Color L Figure 4 71 Advanced tab of Numeric Display Scaling When this option is checked the data displayed will be Value of monitored address x Gain Offset Range display When the value of the monitored address is equal to or lower than the Low Limit the text color and background color as defined in the Low Color will be used in the control When the value of the monitored address is equal to or higher than the High Limit the text color and background color as defined in the High Color will be used in the control When the value of the monitored address is higher than the Low Limit and lower than the High Limit the text color and background color as defined i
187. gth 5 PortID 0 PUTCHARS PortID Data Length 19 SWAPB Description Swap the low byte and high byte of the specified value Usage result SWAPB source Example short source 0x1234 result 247 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 result S WAPB source result 0x3412 20 SWAPW Description Swap the low word and high word of the specified value Usage result SW AP W soutrce Example int source 0x12345678 int result result S WAP W source result 0x56781234 21 SETBIT Description Set specific bit to be ON or OFF Usage result SETBIT source bit_pos 1 Example short source 0x4 short bit pos 2 result result SETBIT source bit_pos 1 result 1 22 XORSUM Description Use XOR to calculate checksum Usage checksum XORSUM source sizeof source 248 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Example char source S5 Oxl 0x20 0x3 0x48 Ox5 short checksum checksum XORSUM source 5 ecksum Ox6f 23 DELAY Description Set a delayed time Usage void DELAY nt dwMilliseconds Example int dwMilliseconds 1000 DELAY dwMilliseconds delay 1000 milliseconds 24 GETBUFFERLENGTH This function is applied for free port communication only Description Get buffer length from communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return bufferlength
188. guration with the touch screen being vertical The default model is horizontal Hew Project Project Froperties Project Hame Fath Cir pe SA 10 44 B00 600 io 4 i a Show Model Horizontal a Model Parameters Model Size 10 4 inch Resolution SO0x600 Pixels GA Color 262 144 Colors TFT LUD User Memory 12M Fower Supply Dc24 15 COMI RS232 RS422 SRS485 Cone RS252 RS4ee RS485 USE 1 Ports B type Max Screen Number 50 Figure 3 1 New project dialog Figure 3 1 shows a New Project dialog Please choose a project name the path for project file saving the model and the show model and then you can click Next to set the communication port The concrete model selection depends on the model of the touch screen actually used by the user wi A project name cannot include the following characters lt gt Vertical model in the show model is only applicable for SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A 66 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 3 1 2 Communication port setting dialog This dialog is used to set communication parameters of the communication port of the touch screen Correct setting of communication parameters is vital for successful communication between the touch screen and PLC The particular parameters depend on the model of the PLC to be connected Link name Name of the communication port Link type Communication manner Device server Model and
189. has been drawn See Figure 4 26 Figure 4 26 Drawing a line gt After completing the above steps the line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the line and double click or click Properties button __in the tool bar after choosing the line At this moment a property dialog as shown in Figure 4 27 will appear Line Line Type al Line Width 1 Line Color i shape Endarr ow D Endl ap Fl at Figure 4 27 Line property dialog gt You may adjust the properties of the line using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for straight line To change the length direction and position of the line you may first choose the line move the mouse to an end of the line press down left key of the mouse after the mouse shape becomes l drag the mouse to appropriate position and finally release the left key 95 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 3 2 Polygonal line Choose Polyline command in Draw menu or click Polyline command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw polygonal lines in the window gt Move the
190. he number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 00123 Leading space Zeros in front of the effective digits will not be displayed but be replaced by space For example if the number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 123 Text color Font color of the data to be displayed UJ Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern i To reset the contents and properties of Numeric Display you can double click the Numeric Display dialog When this control is executed in HMI a keyboard will pop up on the screen for users to enter the data Fractional digits Setting of this parameter will impact the data display effect If the data type chosen is 16 32 digit positive integer or 16 32 digit integer the number displayed will be the return number subject to decimal point left movement by the number of digits as set in this parameter For example if the return number is 212 and the number of fractional digits set here is 2 then 2 12 will be displayed If the data type chosen is 32 digit floating point number then the decimal point will not be moved but only the set fractional digits will be displayed For example if the return number is 2 123 and the number of fractional di
191. he property dialog as shown in 4 107 186 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Data Iransfer Attribute oy on iA Timed Trigger Bits LBO Address Type Fi t Humber of Word Bit Source Address Destination Address LEO Figure 4 107 Data Transfer dialog Attribute Timed Triggered Here you choose the trigger manner of data transfer Timed The data will be transferred basing on specified time interval Triggered Data transfer will be triggered by specified address 1 e triggered when the value of trigger bit is 1 Address Type Here you choose the address type for data transfer including bit word double word Number of Word Bit Here you enter the length of the data to be transferred from 1 to 32 Address Source Address Source address of the data transfer The type of this address must be the same as the address set in Address Type option in Attribute above Destination Address Destination address of the data transfer The type of this address must be the same as the address set in Address Type option in Attribute above i The source address and the destination address should not be the same PLC 187 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 5 16 Multifunction button Multifunction Button can be used to complete multiple steps of user defined operations by single control It helps to simplify user operations and make ope
192. he right click menu and choose Disassemble command in the Assemble option Figure 4 6 shows the contrast before and after disassembling a aS ee Ey hes tS IS e Cancel combination before Cancel after combination Figure 4 6 Contrast before and after disassembling K Several objects can be selected using Shift key K Before assembling please consider whether the elements to be assembled still need touch or monitoring after assembling as the assembled object is a whole object and the elements can be no 83 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 longer touched or monitored 4 2 2 Layer Layer command is a group command used to adjust the display sequence of intersected graph objects in the screen Each graph in SamDraw has a layer and graph objects on upper layer are always displayed on top of the objects on lower layer Thus we can use this command to adjust layer level of graph objects By default objects created later are on upper layer than those created earlier There are four Layer commands that are Move object forward Move object backward Move object one layer forward and Move object one layer backward To execute these commands first choose one or more graph objects in the current screen and then choose corresponding Layer commands in Edit menu or the tool button gt Move object forward This command is used to move the chosen object to th
193. hile statement judges first and executes late If the condition is unsatisfied the loop body statement is not executed for one time while statement and do while statement is usually mutual re write In this example the loop condition is rewritten to be n Otherwise one more loop will be executed There are some points to be noted in do while statement 1 In the if statement and while statement no semicolon is added behind the expression while the expression of do while statement must be ended with semicolon 216 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 do while statement may be composed to the nested loop and nested with while statement mutually 3 The loop body between do and while is made up of several statements and bracketed with to form a compound statement 4 When converting do while and while statement mutually pay attention to modify the loop control conditions 5 2 5 for statement For statement is a kind of loop statement with stronger function and wider application provided by C language Its general form is for Expression 1 Expression 2 Expression 3 Statement Expression1 it is usually to assign initial value to loop variable and it is assignment expression It also allows to assign initial value to loop variable except for statement In this case the expression may be omitted Expression 2 it is usually the loop condition and it is relational expre
194. his device driver is used to read and write the data or state of YOKOGAWA FA series PLC registers by Samkoon SA series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of YOKOGAWA FA series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with YOKOGAWA FA series PLC How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen YOKOGAWA FA series PLC RS422 port D sub 9 pin D female connector socket Resistor BKesistor 2 Software setting Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC type YOKOGAWA Select the corresponding PLC for different models At present FA series PLC Samkoon SA series only supports YOKOGAWA FA series PLC Communication RS232 Adopt standard RS232 serial communication port 9600 Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud 385 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Data bit Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC
195. ice to OFF state and displaying 0 OFF state Momentary If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address of the connected device to 1 ON by pressing down the button and then 1 ON state is displayed and set the value to 0 OFF by releasing the touch button and then 0 OFF state is displayed Invert If this option is checked after downloading to HMI you can set the value of the write address to 1 ON by touching the button and then 1 ON state is displayed if the current state of the bit button is 0 OFF and set the value to 0 OFF by touching the button and then 0 OFF state is displayed if the current state of the bit button is 1 ON In other words the state changes each time the button 1s touched Write address 114 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 You can either enter an address by clicking the address input button or directly type in an address The address name is not case sensitive SamDraw will give corresponding bit address symbols basing on the connected device For example for FX 2N series of Mitsubishi PLCs X represents the address of input coil Y represents the address of the output coil M represents the address of the intermediate relay C represents the address of the counter on off state display T represents the address of the timer on off state display D represents the address of the data register C represents the address of th
196. ick menu Position and size of control can be set by typing in the Status Bar below or by mouse dragging 182 y4 Library Coordinates Left 77 0 Top 3260 Size Aidth 195 9 Feigh gz Sankoon Figure 4 112 Status bar Entering address in control When PLC address is needed to be entered during control property 190 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 setting you can directly enter the address using the keyboard The address is not case sensitive Choosing several controls and then double clicking When you double click multiple controls chosen a Components Address List will appear as shown in Figure 4 113 Components Address List Screen Ham Ubject Hame Address Type Fit Button Write Address Word Button Write Address Meter Monitor Address Setting Figure 4 113 Components address list You can double click an item in this list to modify the property of the chosen control State combination box In the tool bar there is a State Combination Box and here the state of Bit Button Bit Lamp Multi state Switch Multi state Lamp Graphics Move Message Display and Picture Display can be displayed and modified i had bl sl BE Figure 4 114 State combination box When one of the above controls is chosen its current state is displayed in the State Combination Box You can change the current state using the drop down menu 191 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration So
197. igital alarm and analog alarm as shown in figure 7 16 275 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Project Manager Link p COWL Link E com Link Setting a HAL parameter setting GS HAL Status GH PLO Control Ey Clock File Frotection WAL Frotection Le Sereen 3 000 Sereen J 001 Sereen O O 002 Screend Ei Window l G Historical Data Logger EY Historical Data Collecta f Alarm Log f Digital Alarn Log f kinalog Alarm Log Recipe Data Transport Figure 7 16 Select alarm log e Double click the option Digital Alarm Log in unfolded option of alarm log to open the dialog box of digital alarm setting as shown in figure 7 17 Discrete Alarme Glock Wick Waves Discrete Aim Flock O Head Address Ree Block Sire e Scamming Time e g Second is Jiserele Alarn Addre s LBA Message 276 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 7 17 Dialog box of digital alarm The operation step of digital alarm is as follows Firstly enter the bit address to be alarmed in column Read Address Suppose it is set to internal address here Select total number of alarms in option Block Size 1 e total number of digit addresses which are continuous here Suppose the length is set to be 6 here e Users can set the Scanning time of digit alarm as required 1 e scanning frequency Click some o
198. igits Total number of digits including the decimal Fractional digits When the data type is not 32 digit floating point number and the fractional digits are set to n then the maximum value entered should be reduced by 10 For example if the data type chosen is 32 digit positive integer and the number of fractional digits is 3 then you can only enter a value between 0 and 99999 999 Enter Password This option has the same functions as Enter Value option except that there 1s no option of Fractional digits Add After you set the data type the write address the constant and the maximum value the value of the register corresponding to the write address will be added by the constant set each time the Word Button is touched However the value of the write address cannot exceed the maximum value set by you For example 1f the write address is LW1 the constant is 5 and the maximum value is 65535 then each time this control 1s executed the value of LW1 will be added by 5 but will be no higher than 65535 Subtract After you set the data type the write address the constant and the maximum value the value of the register corresponding to the write address will be deducted by the constant set each time the Word Button is touched However the value of the write address cannot 121 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 be less than the minimum value set by you For example if the
199. iguration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 7 27 Recipe effect diagram All data of recipe can be changed saved read and written conveniently through setting function button together with value display input Users have to pay attention to the following several points when using recipe V The recipe table has to be established firstly JV Pay attention to selection of data type when writing required recipe parameter to recipe table 16 digit data occupies one word and 32 digit data occupies two words The selection of data type shall be consistent when selecting controls especially notice the use of 32 digit data address The 32 digit data occupies two words Therefore it is necessary to prevent data address from overlap when entering address into write address and monitor address Address RWIO is fixed which can only be used to change recipe number and cannot be used in any other places Besides when value of RWIO is 0 it standards for first recipe number and so forth JV Recipe parameter address is continuous 7 9 Setting of global macro Set one successfully compiled macro to be global macro When the configuration begins to run 1 e execute this macro instruction the instruction shall be executed in the whole operation course with no limit from screen 64 global macros can be set at most When multiple global macros are set they will be executed according to the set serial number at the time of installation 287
200. igure 7 11 x Project Manager ty Link COWL Link COW Link Setting HMI parameter setting HMI Status ie PLC Control ETY Clock File Protection HMI Froateecti on oc Add Screen i DDL Sereend O02 Sereng Pa Vindow Historical Data Logger E f Alarm Log F Digital Alarm Log F Analog Alarm Log Recipe wl Data Transport Figure 7 11 Screen option of right Key Click the root Screen with right key Then click Add Screen in popped up menu to pop up the dialog box of new screen In this dialog box set Screen Name and Background Color Then click OK to add one screen There are two ways to open other screens 1 double click screen name in Project Manager 2 click screen name with right key and select Open in popped up menu Delete screen click screen name with right key and select Delete in popped up menu to delete the screen View screen attribute 1 click screen name with right key and select Attribute in popped up menu to pop up dialog box of attribute setting or 2 select Screen Attribute in option Screen of menu 270 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 bar to view or modify 71 4 Window Method of adding new window is same to that of adding new screen The operation of Open Delete or View Window Attribute is also same to that of screen Users can refer to previous s
201. ilation Click compile button as following Figure 5 12 and complete save compile connection and error check functions automatically 232 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 mation Output Window errors Compile success Function Close Description Figure 5 12 Information Output Window When the information output window outputs 0 errors Compile success it indicates the macro has established successfully In addition it will be added into the successful compiled list box automatically Otherwise it will prompt the error and add into failed compiled list box Then users may make modification edition even compilation for the compiled program Step 5 lt Create macro ADDSUM gt Create macro ADDSUM as specified from step 2 step 4 as shown in Figure 5 13 create macro ADDSUM lt I gt input ADDSUM in the macro name lt 2 gt input the circled contents in the code compilation window lt 3 gt set the corresponding tag property in the tag setting window lt 4 gt click compile button 233 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bacro Cospiler af Addross Y 0 No Data Type 1 16 Bit Une a 16 Kit Ung 3 16 Bit Uns 4 16 Bit Uns Hew i 2 3 formation Output Window W O errors Compile success Fonction Connie cse _teserintion_ Figure 5
202. ime interval to be time unit write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address circularly Triggered Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address when the trigger address bit is 1 7 2 5 File protect It means that whether the file requires a password to open Double click the option Protect File in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 7 7 Protect Fils Passvordi The tale require a password to open plebsa renanber voor pazzword passverd is Case sensitive Figure 7 7 Dialog box of file protection You can set password when file needs a password to open Double click the option Protect File in Project Manager Select Use Password to Protect File in popped up dialog box and enter password in the corresponding column Then click OK to pop up the dialog box of password conformation as shown in figure 7 8 Confira Password Enter Password Again Figure 7 8 Password input confirmation box Enter password again Click OK to finish password setting When users open the file again after closing it the password entering box as shown in figure 7 9 will pop up 267 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Pass ord The Document is protected Password Figure 7 9 Password entering box The file can be opened only when password is entere
203. ing the table properties click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become A Move the mouse to a position where the table will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The system will automatically draw a table See Figure 4 46 Figure 4 46 An example of a table drawn 107 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 al Such table is a pure graph object and cannot be filled with words data or other embedded objects It can be only used as bottom graph To display words data or other objects over the table you can add text graph and numeric display objects over the table and set top layer for these objects 4 3 12 Scale graph Choose Scale command in Draw menu or click Scale command button E in the tool buttons and then a Scale dialog will pop up See Figure 4 47 Color Ling Color Text Color Dasplay Axis Major Scale 4 Sub Scale T Text Display Text Pie Loni 100 Aininun 0 Font Size 9 Fractional Digits 0 Figure 4 47 Scale dialog gt In the Scale dialog as shown in the figure above SamDraw provides options such as color coordinate axis and text options In Color options you can choose line color and text color In Axis options you can choose whether to display the axis and define the precision of the main scale and sub scale either
204. ing times is equal to the set Number of Sampling stop reading data from memory If this option is not selected when the sampling times is equal to the set Number of Sampling continue to read data from memory VY Notice when current sampling current is Full Limit of total sampling time inform to set address to 1 Click the tab Data Item to set attributes of the page as shown in figure 7 14 Historical Data Collector General Data Item Date Iten Attribute Address Hane Data Typa JB Bit Unsigned Int Display Type 16 Bit Unsigned Decinal Total Digits a Fractional Digits 0 2 M Sealing Gain 2 DF set 1 a i 5 f a a a E E E E E E Figure 7 14 Data item of historical data collector User can set the corresponding attribute for the item in right Data Item Attribute through clicking 273 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 each item in list box Following we take example to describe it in details If user sets read address to LW1 and sample length to 5 in page General after clicking the tab Data Item five columns of data are added in the list box Content of address column is LHO LH4 and name column is empty User can click each line firstly and then set name data type display type total digits fractional digits scaling or not and other attributes for each item in right Data Item Attribute Suppose name of LHO LH4 is
205. ing touch screen setting mode writing a recipe to PLC reading a recipe from PLC setting date and time clearing alarm the previous recipe the next recipe saving the current recipe moving alarm upward moving alarm downward paging down alarm paging up alarm adjusting coordinates system parameters changing user level logging off user level touch sound ON OFF alarm sound ON OFF clearing all historical data clearing historical alarm and HMI protection unlocking 57 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Corresponding to Bit lamp command used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor bit state of single connected device B Corresponding to Multi state lamp command used to set in the current screen a graph to monitor word state of several connected devices with continuous addresses Corresponding to Multi state switch command used to create in the current screen a multi state button to monitor change in the value of single address of the connected device by means of state change ifs m ON m Corresponding to Numeric display command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing the value of the monitored address E e e e e E Corresponding to Numeric entry command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box for data entry and showing the value of the monitored address Corresponding to ASCII charac
206. ink 1 and Link 2 Setting includes HMI parameter setting HMI status PLC Control Clock File Protection and HMI Protection See Figure 2 37 Froject Manager Sh Link y COME Link Pa COM Link i c Setting HMI parameter setting ify HMI Status i FLE Control ae Clock 4 File Protection 7 HMI Protection E Sereaan OO0 Sereenl EJ Window Historical Data Logger F Alarm Loe Digital Alarm Log f Analog Alarm Log Recipe P Data Transport Figure 2 37 Project Manager window 60 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 7 2 System composition of SamDraw SamDraw is the configuration editing software of Samkoon touch screen SamDraw allows designers to edit project configuration on PC and then download the final configuration screen and required communication drivers to the storing mechanism of the touch screen via USB Then communication with PLC or other connected devices can be constructed through the executive body of the touch screen and serial communication Figure 2 38 shows the system composition of SamDraw Touch screen PLC a A Picture editor a P tA gt A m 5 H H pa A a E k 3 A a a A f i Fi a ja Animation shor As A ae q lt 5 A m H a g 5 H a T rm balls bef ie 4 i ry ie Se Ls q Communication drive 4 n h pe Fi W F Figure 2 38 System composition of SamDraw
207. is User Manual introduces how to operate the SA series SamDraw configuration software Please read it carefully to ensure proper use of the software Due to the limited ability of the author it is inevitable that there are some mistakes in this Manual and readers are sincerely invited to find out and correct them If you need further information on this software or more technical supports please contact us and we shall provide sincere service for you Our contact information is as follows Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Address 10 F Building C6 Hengfeng Industrial Town Xixiang Zhoushi Road Baoan District Shenzhen China Tel 0755 29419068 Fax 0755 29455559 E Mail szsamkoon 163 com Web Http www samkoon com cn Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Caution 1 Without prior consent anyone should not reprint or duplicate all or any part of this Manual 2 The contents of this Manual including specs are subject to change without prior notification 3 The author of this Manual tried the best to make it precise If you find any ambiguity or mistake in this Manual please contact us using the contact information provided at the end of this Manual and notify us the serial number indicated on the cover of the Manual On the trade mark and other matters Windows is a registered trade mark of Microsoft Corporation in USA Programmable Logic Controllers PLC refer to products o
208. ish the setting of PLC control 7 2 4 Clock Clock setting includes three functions download the system clock to HMI write time to PLC and synchronize time with PLC Double click the option Clock in Project Manager to pop up a dialog box as shown in figure 265 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software 7 6 Clock User Manual V3 3 Download the system clock to HMI whether download the clock information of system into HMI Write time to PLC gt Data type and length are default value vw Write Time Data to PLC t Download the System Clock to the Data Type 16 Bit BCD Length Write Address trite Method Timed Co Triggered lata Type 16 Bit BCD Read Address Read Method Timed O Triggered Figure 7 6 Dialog box of clock setting gt Write address write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address gt Write mode Timed Treat the set time interval to be time unit Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address circularly Triggered Write the time information of system to corresponding PLC address when the trigger address bit is 1 Synchronize time with PLC 266 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt Data type and length are default value gt Read address read information in PLC address gt Read mode Timed Treat the set t
209. ister value CRC checkout 364 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 0Ox06 function code Write single register 3 Register address 2 bytes High order first low order behind See register address Register value 2 bytes High order first low order behind Any non 0 is valid CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Error response see error response frame J Function code 0x10 16 write multiple registers Request frame format slave address 0x10 initial address of register register quantity register value CRC checkout 0Ox010 function code Write multiple registers Initial address of 2 bytes High order first low order behind See register register address 1 byte Value N 2 e Response frame format slave address 0x10 initial address of register register quantity CRC checkout 0Ox010 function code Write multiple registers 3 Initial address of High order first low order behind register Register quantity High order first low order behind CRC checkout Low order first high order behind Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Error response see error response frame e variable addressing V bit address two state as 0 and only JV register 16 bit or 32 bit variable Variable Name Supported Function Code MODBUS Initial Quantity Description Address LW0 4095 0x 03 0x 06 Ox 10 Oe 4096 Internal regis
210. it Button except that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Screen Button has only one state Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Screen Button ol The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Screen Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some 124 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 settings of Screen Button gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become LA rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 4 Function button Function Button is an important control in the whole touch screen Using this button you can conveniently realize various functions Click and then a Function Button property dialog as shown in Figure 4 63 will appear Function Button a 7 Border Color Fis Color Bi Color Pattern Figure 4 63 Function Button dialog K Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern 1 Turn off background light Used to set the function of the Function Button to turn off alarm light Then you can turn off 125 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 the background light of the touch screen by touching this button
211. it can be no longer moved S Corresponding to Unlock command used to unlock the chosen key 2 Corresponding to Search macro command used to check whether a macro has been used with the result displayed in the information output window UE Corresponding to Macro manager command used to view the macro use by all controls in the specified screen or all screens US Corresponding to Project manager command used to open and close the project manager window val Corresponding to Information output window command used to open and close the information output window e Corresponding to Bit button command used to set in the current screen a touch key for bit operation of the connected device including bit setting resetting inching and alternation w Corresponding to Word button command used to set in the current screen a touch key for word operation of the connected device including constant setting value inputting password inputting adding and subtracting Corresponding to Screen command used to set screen switch in the current screen including opening a screen opening the previous screen closing and opening a screen and closing a screen a Corresponding to Function command used to set in the current screen a control that realizes certain function of the operating system including closing back light confirming alarm restarting enter
212. ith comma to other similar variable but the assignment statement must be ended with semicolon 3 In the variable declaration it is forbidden to assign initial value for several variables successively For example the following declaration 1s incorrect Int a b c 5 must be written to int a 5 b 5 c 5 However the assignment statement must be assigned continuously 4 Note the difference between assignment expression and assignment statement Assignment expression 1s a kind of expression which can be used in any allowable place But the assignment statement can not The following statement is legal 1f x y 5 gt 0 z x the function of statement if expression x y 5 is greater than 0 then z 0 The following statement is illegal 1f x y 5 gt 0 z x as x y 5 is a statement it can not be used in expression 5 2 2 Branch structure program Relational operator and expression In the program it usually compares the size of two data so as to confirm the next process The 210 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 operator for comparing data size is called the relational operator There are such relational operators in C language as following lt less than lt less than or equal to gt greater than gt greater than or equal to equal to I unequal to The relational operator is binary operator which is left associative Its priority is lower than that of arithmetic operator
213. ith that of touch screen J Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of MATSUSHITA PLC The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS422 Baud rate 9600 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Odd PLC address l Operational address range 0 280 Yhhh I O output point 307 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Ky x 0 255 T ddd Elapsed value of timer 0 255 C ddd Elapsed value of counter ddd indicates decimal hhh indicates hexadecimal D ie Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability 1f the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far RS422 communication is not more than 500 m and RS232 communication 1s not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming
214. ividualized PLC communication drive upon request of users Two communication drives can be loaded at the same time in SA 12 1A SA 10 4A SA 10 4B SA 10 2A SA 8A SA 8B SA 7A SA 7B SA 5 7A SA 5 7B SA 5 7C SA 5 7D SA 5 7E and SA 5 7F 4 Resources SamDraw provides abundant resources The picture library of SamDraw includes 3D indicator light 3D button television 3D tank 3D pipe electron bars and the like In addition many pictures are provided with animation properties and can be used to design vivid animation It also allows for user defined picture library and inserting pictures from Windows SamDraw also provides controls that have abundant functions such as trend diagram and alarming controls and the like meeting the requirements of various configurations 2 2 Requirements of SamDraw for computer 2 2 1 Software requirements of SamDraw for computer SamDraw configuration software can be run in the following operating systems 1 Chinese and English Microsoft Windows NT Server 4 0 SP3 required or later release 2 Chinese and English Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 SP3 required or later release 3 Chinese and English Microsoft Windows 98 Me 2000 XP installation of IE 5 0 is recommended for Windows 95 or later release 4 Chinese and English Microsoft Windows VISTA 5 Chinese and English Microsoft Windows 7 SamDraw will refuse to be installed if the operating system does not meet the above requi
215. jects in the current screen Screen Used to create a new screen open screen property window and delete a screen Before deleting a screen please ensure that the screen to be deleted is the current screen and whether there are useful controls in the screen Deleted screens cannot be recovered by means of Undo SamDraw Tool bar SamDraw totally provides three lines of shortcut tool buttons including tool commands and editing commands After getting familiar with these buttons designers can find the desired commands quickly without searching in the menu bar Each button has a floating prompt which appears when you move the mouse to the button SamDraw totally provides 87 tool buttons When these buttons are grey they are invalid under current operation status See Figure 2 36 oa a m A4 Ba 0 2 amp TLFfococeaA BI EPan ccad AN OF HBA SSA ded COBB RE CLAG weee maser BSE enh EENE Figure 2 36 Tool bar As shown in the figure above the commands in the tool bar are corresponding to the commands in the menus The functions of the buttons are as follows 32 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Corresponding to New command with the shortcut key of Ctrl N used to create a new blank project Ss Corresponding to Open command with the shortcut key of Ctrl O used to open an existing project file saved in Windows with an extension name of drw
216. k Left Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Left Align button IE in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Left Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move left to align basing on the left boundaries See Figure 4 19 for a contrast before and after left align 90 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Left align before Left align after Figure 4 19 Contrast before and after left align gt Right Align Right Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the right boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Right Align command in Align option in Edit menu or click Right Align button l in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Right Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move right to align basing on the right boundaries See Figure 4 20 for a contrast before and after right align Right align before Right align after Figure 4 20 Contrast before and after right align gt The Same Width The Same Width command allows designers to set the same width for several graph objects chosen basing on the width of the highest graph object considering the top boundaries without changing the heights of the graph objects and with the top left coordinates of the graph objects bein
217. k project The shortcut key is Ctrl N Open Project Used to open an existing project file saved in Windows Project configuration files with an extension name of drw can be opened The shortcut key is Ctrl O Please do not use SamDraw3 3 to open project configuration files saved by SamDraw3 1 40 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 with an extension name of drw or the program will have an error and close automatically If you are opening a project created with SamDraw3 2 using SamDraw3 3 the system will prompt whether to change it to 3 3 version file and then you can directly change it 3 3 version Close Used to close the current project screen configuration without quitting SamDraw configuration software Save Used to save the current screen configuration that has been changed with the file name and directory being the same as the original The shortcut key is Ctrl S Save As Used to save the current screen configuration with the file name and directory being changeable Quit Used to quit SamDraw configuration software Edit menu Edit menu consists of commands used to edit screen text and drawing as well as some auxiliary commands including Undo U Redo R Cut T Copy C Duplicate D Paste P Delete D Select All A Align Layer Rotary Assemble Mirror Zoom Pan View Grid Grid Width Border Scale The Forward Screen The
218. k the operation for a register is out of range or not 320 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is O or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m 2 If the PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 321 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 7 Connection between OMRON series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the PLC device that supports HostLink communication protocol from OMRON PLC series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection to the communication unit programming port on the PLC through the communication cable CPM1 CIF02 of serial port device in touch screen or builds serial communication to communication adapter CPM1 CIF11 through the serial device in the touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC of OMRON includes CPM series as CPM1 CPMI1A CPM2A CQM series as CQM1 CQMIH and C200H HS ALPHA series When the different PLCs
219. l V3 3 ddd indicates decimal hhh indicates hexademical Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 349 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 14 Connection between FACON FB series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from FACON FB series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of FACON FB series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported FB series
220. l become a cross and now you can draw free line in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a free line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the free line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a curve automatically along the movement track of the mouse Then left click or right click the mouse to complete free line drawing See Figure 4 31 Figure 4 31 Drawing a free line gt After completing the above steps the free line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the free line and double click or click Properties button r _ _1n the tool bar after choosing the free line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the free line using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for free line 4 3 5 Straight connection line Choose Straight Connection Line command in Draw menu or click Straight Connection Line command button it in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now yo
221. le In Display Type you can choose to display information of addresses used by a chosen screen or by all screens Control overlying With control overlying you can execute multiple controls by touching the screen once SamDraw3 3 allows for overlying of 32 controls at most When multiple controls are overlain and then touched they will be executed in turn basing on the overlying layer sequence For example if control 1 2 and 3 are overlain the commands of button 1 2 and 3 will be executed in turn after touching If there is a screen switch button in the overlain controls the screen will be switched after this button is executed and the buttons behind this screen will not be executed 193 9 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 Macro Macro is an advanced control method for touch screen which provides more strong functions for touch screen Through programming for macro command the touch screen is given the same functions as logic and arithmetic operation with PLC Using the macro flexibly is capable to achieve many strong functions that are unavailable for conventional components and to perfect the human computer interface more SamDraw3 3 provides new full macros that are different from the script language mode of other human computer interfaces and these macros are compatible with standard C Language ANSI C89 As there are many literatures about C Language and this information are availabl
222. lect all the objects in the current screen of the current project The shortcut key is Ctrl A Align Used to align two or more objects chosen The align manners include top alignment bottom alignment vertical centering left alignment right alignment horizontal centering the same height the same width and the same height and width 51 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Layer Used to place the object chosen to different screen layer The selectable layers include top layer one upper layer bottom layer and one lower layer Rotary Used to rotate the chosen object The rotary manners include free rotation horizontal rotation and vertical rotation Assemble Used to assemble two or more objects chosen to a control or to disassemble an assembled object to the original objects When using Assemble key do not assemble objects to be touched or it cannot be touched after downloading to the touch screen Users may use Layer command to superpose touch objects Zoom Used to zoom in or out the current screen in order to conduct finer control operation The available zoom options include 1x zoom in recover and 1x zoom out Grid Used to arrange the current screen and cancel grids whose widths have been selected Grid width Used to change the grid width of the current screen The range of such change is 4 16 Simulation status Used to change the ON OFF status of all bit operation ob
223. length 7 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Even PLC address 0 Operational address range 314 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal al Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 315 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 5 Connection between MODICON MODBUS protocol and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of network device register from MODBUS by Samkoon series touch screen It uses the standard MODBUS RTU protocol It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of MODBUS netwo
224. ling F Range Check Gain i Variable Range Offset 0 Hin 0 Nex 65535 Touch Availability V Controlled by Bit Control Bits Available State Gj OM Controlled by User Level V Moti fication Hotification Bits State Ow OOF Figure 4 76 Advanced tab of Numeric Entry Scaling When this option is checked the value of write address number entered by the user 144 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 using the pop up keyboard Offset Gain the value displayed i e the value of monitor address Value of monitor address x Gain Offset Range check It is mainly used to ensure that the number entered by user does not go beyond the minimum value and maximum value as set in Min and Max E Refer to Advanced tab of Bit Button control for use of Touch Availability module and Notification module gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become K Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 10 ASCII character display ASCII Character Display is used to display the ASCII characters in the connected device Click ASCII Character Display icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 77 will appear ASCII Character Display General Visibility p asooo0 Border Color BG Color Text Color Fi Color Fattern Monitor Addre
225. llowing touch screens are slave stations with same communication port RS 485 Figure 9 5 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens When PLC RS232 is slave station 294 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software Communication Port Properties General Paramet er Eoo com i l Link ID Link Name Link Type rect Li Device Server Modbus PLO contiguous address interval Link Port Figure 9 6 First touch screen selects MODUBUS protocol and 1s selected to be primary station Communication Port Properties General Parameter Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 Data bits 5 Check Stop Bits Figure 9 7 Select expanded mode when first touch screen is primary station User Manual V3 3 eee Other HMI Address PLC Address Communication Time Retry Address Model Standard Mode v Refer to figures 9 2 and 9 3 to set the system of touch screen as slave station 298 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Lo RS232 cannot support the connection mode of multi drop Therefore when PLC in mode one device with multiple screens doesn t support port RS485 it is necessary to configure communication adapter to convert RS485 signal into RS232 signal K When Samkoon SA series touch screen is selected to be primary station in mode one device with multiple screens the address mode of
226. ls After completion of setting click the button Save in toolbar to save the project Operate the option Off line Simulation in Download in menu bar and click digit buttons of addresses LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 Then you can see that the alarm information of LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 in Digital Alarm is displayed in both Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar When click LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 again all values of them are 0 due to Alternative function set for digit button And the alarm information of LB1 LB2 LB4 and LB6 in Digital Alarm is displayed in neither Alarm Controls nor Dynamic alarm bar 7 6 2 Analog alarm log Double click the option Analog Alarm Log in unfolded option of alarm log to open the dialog box of analog alarm setting as shown in figure 7 20 279 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Analog Alarm Block Fleck Hane Analog Alarm Block Read Address DMI m Block Size 3 Eod Scanning Time Ki Second r Ce hn alog hlaet Use Message e Low Le e Low v High Type Low Low w High H fF Low Le F Low Limit Hi gh wv High H e Low Lo H Low Text A Hish F High H Address Data Type 32 Bit Unsigned Int Message Figure 7 20 Dialog box of analog alarm log The operation step of analog alarm is as follows e Firstly enter the address to be alarmed in column Read Add
227. ly Bar Graph can present the change in the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices or present directly the real time change of all analog quantities on the process flow See Figure 4 79 Figure 4 79 The steps to insert a bar graph and modify properties of a bar graph are as follows 1 Click Bar Graph icon l in the tool bar or the Bar Graph command in Tool menu and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 80 will appear 2 Inthe pop up dialog set properties of the bar graph and click OK Monitor address Address of the data register presented by the bar graph Max The maximum value of the monitor address that can be presented by the bar graph When the value of the monitor address is higher than this value the bars will be full and will not reflect the change in the value of the monitor address Min The minimum value of the monitor address that can be presented by the bar graph When the value of the monitor address is lower than this value the bars will be empty and will not reflect the 148 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 change in the value of the monitor address Direction The rolling direction of the bar graph including upward downward leftward and rightward Upward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from the bottom to top Downward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from top to bottom Leftwa
228. mDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Off Picture and On Picture Here you can add pictures of different formats to different state according to the Picture Source When you have chosen the desired picture it will be automatically added to General tab When you choose the option of Fit to Object the picture will be of the same size as the control set in the General tab When flicker is chosen the flickering screen will be the screen at ON OFF state and the default frequency is ls To change this frequency double click Touch Screen Parameter Setting option in the Project Manager find Flickering Frequency option in the pop up dialog and then change the frequency to the desired value gt Advanced page will be displayed after you click this tab See Figure 4 57 Bit Button General Label Advanced Visibility Touch Availability Contrelled by Bit Contrelled by User Level Hotification Bits State 0H COFF Figure 4 57 Advanced tab of bit button Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State is 1 then the Bit Button can be effectively touched when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the Bit Button can be effectively touched when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 Controlled by User Level 117 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 When this option is checked a
229. mands First we introduce color selection These color selection and setting process are applicable for all basic object operations introduced later that involve color setting Following these steps designers can select desired colors to meet the needs of the project The embedded color system in SamDraw is very powerful Most objects have the property item of color setting and beside such property item there is a rectangle box with default color with a black downward small triangle on the right bottom corner of the box This indicates that the rectangle can be pulled down You can click any position of the rectangle to pull out the color selection system See Figure 4 24 Figure 4 24 Quick color selection system 93 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 4 24 above shows a color selection system You can click the small colored squares to select desired colors The system provides 228 common colors for selection If you are not satisfied with these colors you can click the button on the right bottom the position of the mouse in Figure 4 24 to call the powerful color system See Figure 4 25 Eu te EHS t PEETER EE eRe ILE EE tee im BTALA C Mic 160 sg o fe 0 Wie oo HEIRE agg o Ew Pee Lee Q Figure 4 25 Color selection system Choose a base color in the color selection dialog or directly choose a base color by clicking a position in the color sp
230. menu See Figure 4 12 for horizontal overturning of single graph object Level before the flip Level after flip Figure 4 12 Contrast before and after horizontal overturning of single graph object See Figure 4 13 for horizontal overturning of multiple graph objects 87 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ee Level betore the flip bowel attarcflip Figure 4 13 Contrast before and after horizontal overturning of several graph objects gt Vertical overturning Vertical rotation allows designers to overturn a chosen graph object or several graph objects by 180 around a horizontal center line Use of the vertical overturning command is simple First choose one or more graph objects then click Vertical Overturn command in Rotary option in Edit t menu or click vertical overturn button in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Vertical Overturn command in Rotary option in the right click menu See Figure 4 14 for vertical overturning of single graph object Vertical flip before Vertical flip after Figure 4 14 Contrast before and after vertical overturning of single graph object See Figure 4 15 for vertical overturning of multiple graph objects Vertical flip before Vertical flip after 88 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 4 15 Contrast before and after vertical overturning of several graph objects 4 2
231. meters Used to set the function of the Function Button to system parameters Then you can open the 127 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 18 19 20 Pale IA D gt 24 25 system parameter page by touching this button on the touch screen In this page some information on the touch screen is displayed and can be modified by touching such as system time screen saver time background light contrast and the like Change user level Used to set the function of the Function Button to change user level Then you can change the privilege of the current user by touching this button on the touch screen If Privilege Login option is chosen then a keyboard will appear on the screen when you touch the Function Button Then after you enter the system password set in Environment Parameter option you can get the privilege corresponding to this user level and thus enter a screen with a level equal to or higher than this level Cancel user level Used to set the function of the Function Button to cancel user level Then you can cancel the privilege of the current user by touching this button on the touch screen so that the user level will become the minimum level that is level 1 Alarm voice On Off Used to set the function of the Function Button to alarm voice On Off Then where there is an alarm in the touch screen the alarm will be audible Function button c
232. ming system automatically As 0 sign is adopted the array length is not normally defined in initialization assignment of character string but processed by system automatically If in the mode of character string the input and output of character array becomes simple and convenient Except the initial value assignment with character string it can input and output the character string of one character array with printf function and scanf function at one time not requiring input output each character with do statement one by one 206 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Section summary I C data type Basic type construction type pointer type and void type Classification and characteristics of basic type Type Specifier Char Int Short int Long integer long int Unsigned Unsigned long Float Double Constant suffix L or for long int U or u for unsigned F or f for float Constant type Byte l 4 Number Range C character set 214783648 214783647 214783648 214783647 922337203685477808 922337203685477807 0 4294967295 0 1844744073709551615 3 4E 38 3 4E 38 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 Int long int unsigned float char char string symbol constant and escape character Data type conversion Auto conversion The system realizes auto conversion for the hybrid operation of different types of data which converts from small byte data to big byte data For the
233. mutual assignment of different data the system also converts automatically which converts the right data type into left one Forced conversion It is converted by forced conversion operator 6 Priority and associativity of operator 207 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Generally speaking the unary operator has higher priority and the assignment operator has lower priority The arithmetic operator has higher priority and the relational and logical has lower priority Most operators have left associativity unary operator ternary operator and assignment 7 Expression Expression 1s the formula composed with connection constant variable and function of operator Each expression has one value and type The evaluation of expression is made according to the sequence specified by priority and associativity of operator 8 Array l Array is the commonest data structure in program design The array contains numerical array int array float array character array and pointer array structure array to be described later 2 Array may be one dimensional two dimensional or multi dimensional 3 The type declaration of array consists of type specifier array name and array length elements quantity of array The array element is also called subscript variable The array type refers to the value type of subscript variable 4 Make array assignment with three methods initialization assignment
234. n Naz 22 A Figure 5 19 General Project Compile lt 2 gt Select download D gt USB D from menu and select download in the dialog box Complete download and restart the touch screen or click the function button of compile download shortcut in black circle to complete operation by one step 239 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Step 8 lt Result Test gt After the touch screen is restarted it will display as following Figure 5 20 This is because the macro Init is executed at startup This directive is the result that the timer triggers to execute macro Init Figure 5 20 Display Initial Numerals Enter data as 31 42 53 64 into the numeral entry display respectively click to execute ADDSUM Then it will output the execution result 190 The final effect is shown as Figure 5 21 K al qi Bs Ad 130 Figure 5 21 Result Display To the end of this section all required functions as macro edition compilation download and test have been completed smoothly and a simple macroblock runs in normal condition 240 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 5 5 Appendix 1 1 ADDSUM Description Use addition to calculate checksum Usage Checksum ADDSUM data size of data Example char data 5 Oxl 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x20 int checksum checksum ADDSUM data 5 checksum 0x2a 2 ASCI
235. n open the formula settings window where you can set the parameters of the formula needed by yourself File protection Used to open file protection password setting window where password can be set for the purpose of protection Macro editor Used to open the macro editor to add modify compile or delete a macro Converter Used to open the converter which can convert V3 2 configuration projects to V3 3 ones Global macro Used to open global macro setting interface to set or modify global macro Initial macro Used to open initial macro interface to set or modify initial macro Please keep firmly in mind the password after setting Project configuration files with password can be opened only after correct password is entered The password is case sensitive Download menu Download menu is used to compile and download configuration project consisting of four commands that is Compile C Off line Simulation M USB Download D and Compile Download A After the touch screen is connected to PC via USB cable you can download the configuration project to the touch screen after compiling the configuration project See Figure 2 31 Download t Help H Compile fC off line Simulation M on line Simuletion USE Download 0 Compil atDownloadtA Upload Figure 2 31 Download menu Compile Used to check the configuration project created by the user and prepare for downloading Off line simulation Used
236. n the General tab will be used in the control Variable range If this option is not checked the High Limit and Low Limit will be the numbers entered by the user if this option is checked the High Limit and Low Limit will be the values of the addresses entered by the user For example if the BG color and text color in General tab are defined with Range Display checked 140 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 as shown in Figure 4 72 then the text and background color of the Numeric Display will change with the change of the value of the monitored address as shown in Figure 4 73 Hameric Display General Advanced Yisibility FG Color Border Color TEETE Bis Color Text Color I Fattern Solid v w Range Display ariable Range Low Limit 10 High Limit 20 High Color Low Color Text Color MMMM text coror BG Coler ec Be Color co Figure 4 72 Range Display checked Figure 4 73 An example of numeric display al Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Visibility tab P When 32 digit data type is chosen for Numeric Display the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to
237. n the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to draw an Alarm Control on the screen See Figure 4 96 Figure 4 96 Ld Size of Alarm Control is determined by the number of Rows and the maximum character length of the alarm information The size and position of Alarm Control can be adjusted using the mouse 172 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 7 Dynamic alarm bar Dynamic Alarm Bar is used to display the current alarm The difference between Dynamic Alarm Bar and Alarm Control is that the former displays the current alarm information in the form of rolling texts digital alarm and analog alarm If there are 3 alarm at present Dynamic Alarm Bar will display the first the second and the third alarm in turn and repeatedly in rolling form either from left to right or from right to left The movement speed movement interval and alarm voice are determined by the related parameters Refer to Alarm Bar Setting Before using a dynamic alarm bar you must configure the alarm settings first Refer to Alarm Setting The steps to insert a dynamic alarm bar are as follows Click Dynamic Alarm Bar command in Tool menu or click button in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 97 will appear 173 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alarm Har Border Col
238. nced tab of GIF Display Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State 1s 1 then the GIF picture will have animation effect when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the GIF picture will have animation effect when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 l Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 2 Trend chart Overview of trend chart Displaying continuous values of variables on a dynamic and continuous basis Reference curves for multiple data can be drawn Time will be used as the horizontal axis and value will be used as the vertical axis to visualize the change trend of the value in a period 8 polygonal lines can be displayed at most 160 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Steps to insert a Trend Chart and modify its properties are as follows 1 Click Trend Chart icon Lh in the tool bar and then a Trend Chart property dialog as shown in Figure 4 90 will appear Trend Chart eneral Fen MY kuis Wisibilite m E Bordar Color BG Color Date Type L6 Bit insimed Int Baad Tei gare Brad Add ace Bunter of Data Hunber of Dota Points Fer Dota IEU Sapling Tine ar Directiun Fram Lefi to Righi Pyron Richt to Left Show Tata Forni Marker i Shev Connected Lins BG Color Clear Trigger Figure 4 90 Trend Chart dialog Border Color
239. nd an Effective Minimum Level is chosen the Bit Button can be effectively touched when and only when the current user level is equal to or higher than the Effective Minimum Level The default user level is 1 that is the minimum level Designers can change the user level in the Change User Level option in the function buttons after entering correct password Effective touch means that there are actual actions after the control is touched for example successful setting resetting inching and alteration Notification will be given only upon effective touch Taking numeric entry for example when you touch numeric entry button a keyboard will pop up At this moment although the numeric entry button has action against the touch no write operation will be carried out to the write address so there will be no notification If the keyboard is quitted by pressing ESC no notification will be generated either Only when you type in a number between the maximum value and the minimum value via the keyboard and then press ENTER key there will be notification and such touch will be an effective touch Notification When this option is checked given an effective touch the system will write the State value 1 or 0 chosen by you to the notification address you entered that is to conduct Setting or Resetting operation for the address gt Visibility page will be displayed after you click Visibility tab This page is mainly u
240. ne To change the length direction and position of the polygonal line you may first choose the polygonal line move the mouse to the polygonal line press down left key of the mouse after the mouse shape becomes l drag the mouse to appropriate position and finally release the left key 4 3 3 Curve Arc 96 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Choose Curve Arc command in Draw menu or click Curve Arc command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw curve arc in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a curve arc will be drawn left click the mouse and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be the starting point of the polygonal line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Then left click the mouse and release gt At this moment the mouse shape is still a cross Move the mouse to another position where you want to set the end of the curve arc press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to move in the screen Then release the mouse and right click it to complete the drawing process See Figure 4 29 Figure 4 29 Drawing a curve arc gt As shown in Figure 4 29 in the curve drawn the starting point is a green do
241. nected device where the data to be displayed are saved total display digits of the data fractional digits of the data font size font color alignment and value adjustment Data type Here you can choose different data types according to the data in the register address to be monitored Display type Here you can choose different display types according to actual needs Monitor address This control is used to display data and the Monitor Address is the data register address of the PLC or other connected device to be displayed Fractional digits The number of fractional digits of the data to be displayed Font Here you can choose common font or digital font Font size Here you can change the font size according to actual needs Alignment Center alignment by default Left Align the data to be displayed on the left side of the display box 138 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Center Align the data to be displayed in the middle of the display box Right Align the data to be displayed on the right side of the display box Justification Zero Suppres by default Zero Suppres Zeros in front of the effective digits will not be displayed For example if the number of the monitored address is a 16 digit positive integer and its value is 00123 then the number displayed in the display box will be 123 Leading zero Zeros in front of the effective digits will be displayed For example if t
242. ng dialog of the touch screen For selection of touch screen model and show model refer to New Project dialog In this dialog you can also change the picture shown after start up of the touch screen that is the first picture downloaded to the touch screen and shown after start up of the touch screen The drop down menu is for screen name and you can click here to set the start up picture See Figure 3 6 Other Splash screen F Screen Sarer Time Flicker Frequency 10 seit 0 JE Alarm Voice Ho Voice Fronpls Touch Volos Have voice Fron Screensavers Screen C Load Sereen Figure 3 6 Setting start up picture Set the screen saver time that is the time before starting up screen saver The default time is 1 minute You can set this time by directly inputting a value or by clicking the tuning button K The screen saver time is effective only if screen saver is enabled After the screen saver 70 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 picture appears you can simply touch the screen to go back the original screen Flicker frequency This parameter defines the frequency of the flicker of objects or controls with flicker option You can set this parameter by directly inputting a value or by clicking the tuning button Alarm voice With this parameter you can set alarm sound for the system The options include No voice prompt and Voice prompt Touch voice You can set whethe
243. ng position of the ellipse circle to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw an ellipse circle automatically Then left click the mouse See Figure 4 38 Figure 4 38 Drawing an ellipse circle gt To change the size of the ellipse circle first choose it and move the mouse to any of the 8 green square dots on the frame of the ellipse circle When the mouse becomes or f oor press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position Then release the left key of the mouse So far the size of the ellipse circle has been adjusted Changing width of ellipse circle p Changing height of ellipse circle i Changing both width and height of ellipse circle gt After completing the above steps the ellipse circle has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the ellipse circle and double click or click Properties button r __in the tool bar after choosing the ellipse circle At this moment a property dialog similar to that in rectangle drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the ellipse circle using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for ellipse circle to make the graph more beautiful and
244. nication port Baud rate Data bit length Stop bit length Parity check bit 317 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 PLC address l Operational address range 0 9999 Idddd Input bit register 0 9999 3dddd Analog input register 0 9999 Adddd Holding register Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 The correct communication port is selected or not 5 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m 2 If the PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 318 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 6 Connection between MODICON Unitelway protocol and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of Unitelway network device register from MODICON by Samko
245. ning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for curve connection line 4 3 7 Rectangle Choose Rectangle command in Draw menu or click Rectangle command button C in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw rectangle in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a rectangle will be drawn left click the mouse or press down and hold and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be the left top starting position of the rectangle to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a rectangle automatically Then left click the mouse See Figure 4 35 Figure 4 35 Drawing a rectangle gt To change the size of the rectangle first choose it and move the mouse to any of the 8 green square dots on the frame of the rectangle When the mouse becomes or f or press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position Then release the left key of the mouse So far the size of the rectangle has been adjusted Changing width of rectangle p Changing height of rectangle i Changing both width and height of rectangle gt After completing the above steps the rectangle has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pa
246. nsion module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of IDEC MICRO Smart FC series PLC Take FC4A C24R2 as an example XO XI15 X30 read X dddo input storage X107 YO Y11 Y30 Y dddo output storage Y107 MO M1267 M dddo intermediate relay ae ddd_ indicates the decimal ooo indicates the octal 383 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 384 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 24 Connection between YOKOGAWA PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen T
247. nt recipe Both memory address in HMI and data register in PLC of recipe are generated automatically in order which cannot be changed V Recipe number register Recipe number is generated automatically in order and cannot be changed which corresponds to the order of recipe name in data item 284 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 The recipe data item is as shown in figure 7 25 General Data Tien Recipe Home Source Recipe Farber i a ees ee Copy Recipsa Data i D 0 0 0 D 0 0 D D D 0 D 0 D 0 i i aca ao gis So ols Figure 7 25 Screen of recipe data item Vv Name Name of current recipe J Data Data write and display of each address in current recipe J Copy recipe data Copy data in source recipe number into objective recipe number after entering click OK to save current recipe click Cancel to exit current dialog box After the completion of recipe configuration you can design screen and operate recipe in HMI Example of concrete recipe application 1 Establish recipe configuration according to above mentioned method as shown in figure 7 26 below 285 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Wei pE ica Ganaral Data Iten Recipe Hang RECIPES i Somrce Recipe Nenber at os i E Li a wi Oo ofp ca 1 f j i E 30 ao a e a a aale oc co
248. o lines connecting these two points Finally release the left key to complete drawing gt After completing the above steps the polygon has default settings in transparency line type line width line color and filling pattern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the polygon and double click or click Properties button er in the tool bar after choosing the polygon At this moment a property dialog similar to that in rectangle drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the polygon using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for polygon to make the graph more beautiful and vivid See Figure 4 41 104 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 4 41 An example of a polygon drawn 4 3 10 Text graphs A Choose Text command in Draw menu or click Text command button in the tool buttons and then a Static Text dialog will pop up See Figure 4 42 vlati tert Font Size 16 Font Temte ka Fant Ealar m PontBold Font Ttalic Tent Ali ford Interval T S sl Line Interval U Foot UnderLins fl Faltern Transparent gr Alpis ee S Back Color fl Front Color ae Figure 4 42 Static Text dialog gt Input the words to be displayed in the text area in the above dialog gt You can change the font size of the text to be dis
249. ocal memory bit LW local memory register and RWI recipe index LB LBO LB4095 LW LW0O LW4095 LW3000 LW3999 belongs to power off held area RWI RWIO RWI4095 8 1 LB Initialize to ON These bits are initialized to ON when the touch screen is starting 1000 1010 4010 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017 Recipe download Recipe upload Recipe save Recipe download instruction Recipe upload instruction Restart touch screen Background light control of touch screen Indication of COMO This bit can be used to trigger transmitting recipe data to PLC from recipe index register RWI This bit can be used to trigger transmitting recipe data to recipe index register RWI from PLC Save recipe data to designated recipe of system from recipe index register The designated recipe is determined by RWI500 Use this bit address to instruct that the recipe download course is ON when it is downloading and is OFF read when downloading is finished Use this bit address to instruct that the recipe upload course is ON when it is uploading and is OFF read when uploading is finished The touch screen can be restarted when this bit is ON Control background light on off of touch screen The light will be off when this bit is ON and will be ON when this bit is OFF Display current connection status of touch screen and PLC OFF communication failed NO communication successful
250. og box of recipe configuration through recipe setting in menu bar or recipe in project manager as shown in figure 7 24 283 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 General Nata Iken Hane RacdpaO ascription Bacipe Langih ars amber sE Eeeipe ft Date Type i8 Bit Uncignad Int W Fievte Aecupe Te FIC irite fubdress E n Asad Eazipa Porn PLE H Road kdiraze Identical to Trite Address E Etcipa Banos Address Kame Corrent Kecipe T gt ET Address Rangs ladle mes Fecips Horbar Register EFI Recipes Export Recipe Inpert tae Xe Figure 7 24 Dialog box of recipe attribute setting J Name Name of current recipe file only one group of file 1s supported temporarily J Description Name description and explanation of current recipe file VY Recipe length Length and quantity of current recipe read record address Address of recipe record table is sorted in order which is generated by system automatically and cannot be changed The number of address can reach up to 1000 Number of recipe Recipe quantity which can reach up to 100 Vv Data type Data type of data register V Write recipe to PLC Set address of related data register of recipe and PLC J Read recipe from PLC Set address of related data register of recipe and PLC VJ Recipe memory Memory addresses range of recipe in HMI which is generated automatically and cannot be changed V Curre
251. ollowing Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length i Parity check bit Odd PLC address l Operational address range C E a C C a ooo p feee po e ooo pom feee e par eooo p eee ro ae 368 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Cr O 177 read write C o00 Elapsed value of counter 000 indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the controller is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Select the accurate communication port PORT2 or not 5 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 369 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 20 Connection between Hitachi PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This devic
252. ommunication connection parameter setting screen management alarming setting recipe setting and historical data collection Information output window Displaying prompt messages such as input output information and error prompt when the designer are editing and compiling configuration Status bar Displaying current configuration status including coordinate of mouse control type coordinate of control size of control and the like Menu bar of SamDraw Menu bar of SamDraw configuration editing software provides users with abundant menu options and here you can find almost all tool commands and editing commands required during configuration The menu bar consists of File menu Edit menu Draw menu Object menu Screen menu Setting menu Download menu and Help menu and also includes right click menus See Figure 2 24 File F Edit View Draw T Object Screen P Setting Download Help H Figure 2 24 Menu bar File menu File menu includes such options as New Project N Open Project O Close C Save S Save As and Quit Q Grey options indicate the corresponding operation is invalid under current environment To open File menu click the File F button on the left top corner of the screen and then a drop down bar will appear See Figure 2 25 Edit View I O New CH Ctrl H Al OF en W Ctrl o Close C 1 Dave AS Exit iQ Figure 2 25 File menu New Project Used to create a new blan
253. on and output format to avoid mistakes The unsigned number can be indicated with suffix The unsigned number of integer constant is suffixed with U or u For example 358u Ox38Au 235Lu are the unsigned number Use prefix and suffix together to indicate different figures For example OXASLu indicates the hexadecimal unsigned long int A5 and the corresponding decimal is 165 3 Integer variable The integer variable can be classified as following l Int Its type specifier is int which occupies 2 bytes in the memory Its value is always basic integer Short int Its type specifier is short int or short C110F1 The occupied bytes and value range is same to basic int Long int Its type specifier is long int or long which occupies 4 bytes in the memory Its value is always long integer Unsigned int Its type specifier is unsigned The unsigned int can be integrated with the above three types 1 The type specifier of unsigned int is unsigned int or unsigned 196 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 The type specifier of unsigned short int is unsigned short 3 The type specifier of unsigned long int is unsigned long All unsigned int occupies the same memory bytes with the signed int As the sign bit is omitted it can not indicate the negative number The following table lists the assigned memory bytes and number range of various integers in ARM Type Specifier Numbe
254. on between LG MASTER Kxxx series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of PLC registers from LG MASTER Kxxx series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of LG MASTER Kxxx series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported MASTER Kxxx series PLC includes K10S 30S 60S 80S 120S K200S When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port Exxx WS DAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen 347 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA _LG232 2 Software setting PLC address is defaulted to be 0 Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of LG The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length i Parity check bit None PLC address 0 Operational address range E RB _ FO po Oa rates o Sr os frist 348 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manua
255. on in Edit menu or click Bottom Align button nin the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Bottom Align command in the Align option in the right click menu Then the graphs will move downward to align basing on the bottom boundaries See Figure 4 17 for a contrast before and after bottom align 89 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 a PEA botton align after Pe se botton align before Figure 4 17 Contrast before and after bottom align gt Vertical Centering Vertical Centering command allows designers to center several graph objects chosen basing on the same vertical line that is the vertical center line of the range from the left boundary to the right boundary of the graph objects To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then click Vertical Centering command in Align option in Edit menu or click Vertical Centering button la in the tool buttons or call the right click menu and click Vertical Centering command in the Align option in the right click menu See Figure 4 18 for a contrast before and after vertical centering botton align before botton align after Figure 4 18 Contrast before and after vertical centering gt Left Align Left Align command allows designers to align several graph objects chosen basing on the left boundaries of the graphs To do this first select several graph objects 2 or more and then clic
256. on moving along the X axis ka PE K Coordinate floor o A r a Coordinate ceiling B40 Cancel Help Figure 4 98 Graphics Move dialog Path If the monitor address is internal storage address LW 1 and the data type is 16 digit then Horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only and the movement range should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the Y coordinate is the value of LW2 Moving along both X and Y axis The graph moves in both horizontal and vertical direction the movement range along X axis should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling and the movement range along Y axis should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 the X coordinate 1s the value of LW2 and the Y coordinate is the value of LW3 Proportional horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate 176 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Ceiling The total
257. on port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screen Adopt defaults in general It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates the communication interval between touch screen and PLC Generally the defaults are adopted It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection 404 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Select Allen Bradley and Allen Bradley DF1 in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly If changes are needed it should
258. on project After completion of compiling screen configuration you need to click Save button on the tool bar or use shortcut key Ctrl S Then you can compile the configuration screen by clicking Compile tool or Compile command in Download menu During the compiling by the system the compiling information will be displayed real time in the information output window If there is an error in the screen configuration the compiling cannot be completed See Figure 3 8 X f error Sereenl Bit Button Write AddressIntput error Figure 3 8 Prompt of compiling error You can modify the configuration screen basing on the error prompt in the information output window or double click the error to allow the software to find the error automatically Then you can double click the wrong object to view its property setting find the source of the error and make corresponding modification After modification click Save button and execute Compile command again If there is no error in the configuration after executing the Compile command a dialog will appear to show successful compiling Click OK to complete the compiling process See Figure 3 9 T2 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 and 3 10 Compiling Screen Screen Compiling Screen Screend Compiling Screen Screen3 Figure 3 9 Information output window Figure 3 10 Successful compiling 1 Compiling is a n
259. on series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of Unitelway network device register of MODICON through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC of MODICON includes TSX Micro NANO NEZA series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port EODICON WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen F 319 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA MODICON 2 2 Software setting The communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Baud rate 9600 Communication port RS485 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Odd Operational address range Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Chec
260. on to assign the array elements one by one 3 Character array The array for storing characters is called character array The form of type declaration for character array is same to that of numerical array as previous introduction For example char c 10 As the character and integer is similar it can be defined as int c 10 but each array element occupies 2 bytes in memory The character array may be two dimensional array For instance char c 5 10 is a two dimensional character array The character array is allowed to made initialization assignment in type declaration Take static char c 10J c p r o g r a m as an example After assignment the element value is c O c 1 c 2 c 3 c 4 c S c 6 c 7 c 8 c 9 for array C Wherein c 9 is not assigned and assigned to 0 by system automatically When assigning initial value for all elements the length declaration can be omitted such as static char c l c p r 0 g r a m in which the length of C array is set to 9 C language allows for initialization assignment for array in character string For example static char c c p r o g 1 a m can be written to static char c C program or sratic char c C program without The assignment in character string occupies one more byte than assignment one by one It is used to store the ending sign of character string 0 The actual storage of array c in memory is C program 0 Wherein 0 is added by C program
261. oni oura Onon a E E A cates ate E TU 282 7 9 SEU Or SIO pal Mac TO rnn T TA T T E Milan Oahu ein haunts 286 T0 Stine oida MaC Oaiorse n a nina asses sleds eee bee eae 287 Bi Oye TES IVe dre ISTOT srona eA E E E A EEE EEA EE cast hice tra ria 289 8 1 1 E D EANAN PE TEEN OAEI EENE toate on dees MEE E NAE IAE E A EEA AT A EEN 289 8 2 EN a eateteaah teach anole deen cet hy le teh T a cela a ede ML a aml as cae at ec 290 8 3 TR VW Tessa teed cea ei Sassi steadier aad aes ea lsaaenG eatin ib a 292 9 Connection mode of One device with multiple screens and One screen with multiple devices lor samkoon SA series touch screenie e A E A wianoudaseboteacdadetionates 293 gN Connection mode of One device with multiple screens between Samkoon SA series touchscreen and P LOrunsorconuinioiei i E TNE EE EET TNE E T TE 293 92 Connection mode of one screen with multiple devices between Samkoon SA series touc SEX else tee 000 PEC iae oa OATES NORPRO COREE a RT VN NONE ASR EON NE NN RR 298 tO mam Draw device Un Vernier A tier ts tele eietl ease Sack ele ake Sad Shee oe cat tans 301 10 1 Pin definition of communication port Of touch SCLECN cceeeeeseececeeecceeeeceeaaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 303 10 2 Connection between MATSUSHITA FP series PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen 304 10 3 Connection between EMERSON EC series PLC and Samkoon series touch screem 00006 308 10 4 Connection between VIGO
262. onnection with the programming port of ALTEC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and ALTEC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series support all instrument communication with ALTEC How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with ALTEC through programming cable Detailed connection refers to ALTEC instruction 2 Software setting The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Data bit length 7 Stop bit length i Parity check bit Even PLC address 0 Address mode must be extension mode 378 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication address parameter Oc o o peo Cow a o o CODE AL2 alarm value cone e e ee cone a o fame Cow o m eoo Cow aoe 379 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 CODE 28 H1 max output power at running slope 1 amp platform 1 CODE 29 H2 max output power at running slope 1 amp platform 1 CODE 30 H3 max output power at running slope 1 amp platform 1 All above registers are 32 bit floating points Different ALTEC instruments have different register addresses Detailed parameters refer to ALTEC instruction manual 1 Communication failure an
263. onstant occupies one byte in the memory The bytes of character string constant are equal to the bytes of character string plus 1 Save character 0 ASCII code 0 in the increased byte This is the ending symbol of character string For example the byte of C program in memory is C program 0 Although the character constant a and character string constant a has one character both their memory occupation is different a occupies one byte in the memory which is indicated as a a occupies two bytes in the memory which is indicated as a 0 symbol constant 10 Symbol constant In the C language a constant can be expressed with an identifier which is called symbol 200 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 constant It must be defined before usage Its general form is define symbol constant Wherein define is a preprocessor directive which is called macro definition directive It is used to define the identifier to the constant value Upon definition all of this identifier in the future program will be replaced by the constant value Usually the identifier of symbol constant is expressed with capital letter and the variable identifier is expressed with lowercase letter for distraction define PI 3 14159 void main float s r t s PI r r printf s of n s j It is defined by macro definition directive P1 is definined to be 3 14159 and s r is defined to be float 5 gt r PI
264. ontrol and modify its properties are as follows 1 Click Meter control icon r in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 99 will appear 177 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 General Scale Visibility Shape Needle Color Needle Base Color BG Color Heedle Type Direction Clockwise C Counter clockwise Data Type 18 bit Unsigned Int w Monitor Address a Maz Figure 4 99 Meter dialog Needle Color Here you can change the color of the pointer Needle Base Color Here you can change the color of the pointer base BG Color Here you can change the background color Direction Here you can choose clockwise or counterclockwise movement of the pointer Data Type Here you can choose different data types according to actual needs Monitor Address An address the value of which will be displayed in the meter and pointed by needle Max Maximum value of the monitor address allowed Min Minimum value of the monitor address allowed 2 Click the Scale tab to set scale properties See Figure 4 100 178 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Humber of Humber of v Axis v Marks Font Size Min o Max Total Digits a i 1 1 E j it Fractional Digits U Figure 4 100 Scale tab of Meter In this tab you can set scale color number of main scales number o
265. or J Message Bir Color ID Fis Color Ses Fattern Tl Soli d Text Font Size Text Color Attribute Speed Direction Left Co Right Alarm sort Time C By Time Reversal Figure 4 97 Dynamic Alarm Bar dialog Font size Here you can change the word size of the alarm text Text color Here you can change the word color of the alarm text Speed Movement speed of the alarm information Direction Movement direction of the alarm information either from left to right or from right to left Alarm sort Display sequence of the alarm information l Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern fl If Off line Simulation is to be called the Font Size must be 16x16 if not other font sizes can be used 174 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 8 Historic alarm display The main function of Historic Alarm Display is to display previous alarm information This control has the same operation steps as Alarm Display so you can refer to the introduction of Alarm Display for reference The icon of Historic Alarm Display in the tool bar is Refer to Alarm Display control for the basic operations i Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 9 Graphics move Graphics Move control is used to make a pic
266. or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 406 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 11 Contact Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd Address 10 F Building C6 Hengfeng Industrial Town Xixiang Zhoushi Road Baoan District Shenzhen China Tel 0755 29419068 Fax 0755 29455559 E Mail szsamkoon 163 com Web Http www samkoon com cn 407
267. or some settings of Function Button The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Function Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Function Button gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become KI Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 5 Bitlamp Bit Lamp can be used to monitor the ON OFF state of the bit contact of the connected device and to display the corresponding state on the screen See Figure 4 64 Figure 4 64 Steps to set a Bit Lamp are as follows F 1 Choose the Bit Lamp button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 65 will appear 130 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 General Label _ Visibility ID Shape state Gi Border Color Fir Color BG Color Pattern seia Data Type Monitor Address Figure 4 65 Bit Lamp dialog l Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern 2 In the General page of the Bit Lamp choose an address to be monitored by the lamp and set such parameters as the display texts and picture and flicker in Label page Mf The Label tab of Bit Lamp is exactly the same as the Label tab of Bit Button Thus
268. orresponding values of the monitored address the position of the rectangle changes with the corresponding values of the monitored address Only Size is chosen The width and height of the rectangle changes based on the anchor point defined with the position remaining unchanged The meaning of the four anchor points is as follows Upper left The upper left corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the lower right corner Upper right The upper right corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the lower left corner Lower left The lower left corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes 170 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 towards the upper right corner Lower right The lower right corner of the rectangle is fixed and the size of the rectangle changes towards the upper left corner Solid If this option is not checked the rectangle will be a hollow rectangle without background color if this option is checked the rectangle will be filled with the background color defined in BG Color option Border If this option is not checked the rectangle will have no border line and thus the border line color cannot be changed if this option is checked the rectangle will have border line and the border color can be changed through the Border Color option below f L Refer to Bit
269. ouching this button on the touch screen 7 Set time and date Used to set the function of the Function Button to set time and date Then you can set internal time and time of the touch screen by touching this button on the touch screen 8 Clear alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to clear alarm Then you can clear chosen and confirmed historical alarm information by touching this button on the touch screen 9 Previous recipe Used to set the function of the Function Button to previous recipe Then you can open the previous recipe of the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen If the current recipe is the first recipe or there is only 1 recipe the recipe parameters will not be changed by 126 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 ne 12 13 14 15 16 17 touching Next recipe Used to set the function of the Function Button to next recipe Then you can open the next recipe of the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen If the current recipe 1s the last recipe or there is only 1 recipe the recipe parameters will not be changed by touching Save current recipe Used to set the function of the Function Button to save current recipe Then you can save the recipe parameters from corresponding continuous data register addresses which are write addresses set by designers during recipe se
270. picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 3 Screen button Screen Button is mainly used to switch screens change user level and pop up window and the like You can make the screen window switch to a set screen window by touching a set screen button and during the switching process you can also choose whether to change user level gt Click Screen Button icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 61 will pop up 122 S Function module Open Screen Here you can choose a screen to be opened in Screen option so that the screen will be Open Previous Screen When this option is checked the screen will jump to the previous screen Close and Open Screen This function can be only used in window page It is used to close the General Lebel Advanced Visibility henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software Screen Hutton User Manual V3 3 Border Color Fis Color BG Color Pattern Operation O Upen Screen E Upen Frevious Screen C Close Upen Sereen Close Screen Screen Change User Level Login Required if Level is Insufficient Figure 4 61 Screen Button dialog screen or window 123 K Refer to the introduction of Bit Button for Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern opened after you click the screen button in the touch screen This function can be used in after yo
271. played in the drop down menu of Font size The font sizes provided by SamDraw are 7 56 points gt You can change the font in the drop down menu of Font SamDraw provides almost all fonts Fonts led by indicate horizontal display of the Chinese characters See Figure 4 43 105 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 o i oe 7 Ir aL frm y f m a oe _ 1 j 7 E dei al F tae sf a a Bad T f F i F i all i rl f E i G a ka Le ee QAI TAW The left for font style prefix for font styles Figure 4 43 Text appearance test gt Left click the small square in front of FontBold FontlItalic in the dialog a green tickle will appear indicating the words will be displayed in bold Italic gt You can change the word interval and line interval by means of the corresponding fine tuning button The range of such intervals is 0 15 gt SamDraw provides up to 16 underline forms and you can change the display position of the words in the text box and the filling pattern and transparency See Figure 4 44 Figure 4 44 An example of a text graph gt After the font properties are modified click OK button to close the dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become K Move the mouse to a position where text will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The syst
272. ple 0 0 25 5 789 0 13 5 0 300 267 8230 are the legal float number 2 Exponential form It is composed of decimal digit exponent symbol e or E and exponent be integer only symbol is possible The basic form is an E n a is decimal n is decimal integer and the value is a 10 n For example 2 1E5 equal to 2 1 10 5 3 7E 2 equal to 3 7 10 2 0 5E7 equal to 0 5 10 7 2 8E 2 equal to 2 8 10 2 The following are the illegal float number 345 without decimal point E7 without figure before exponent symbol 5 without exponent symbol 53 E3 negative sign is incorrect 2 7E without exponent The standard floating number in C language has suffix The figure with suffix f or F is the floating number For example 356f and 356 is equivalent 6 Float variable The float variable includes single and double Their type specifiers are float and double In the Turbo C the single occupies four bytes 32 bit memory and it is ranged between 3 4E 38 3 4E 38 which provides seven effective figures only The double occupies 8 bytes 64 bit memory and the value is ranged between 1 7E 308 1 7E 308 which provides sixteen effective figures The form and written rules for float variable declaration 1s same with that of integer For example float x y x y is single float double a b c a b c 1s double float The float constant is not classified into single and double All float constants are processed as double a E
273. ption in list box Then move mouse to the edit box Text in right module Message and enter text information in it 1 e alarm content Suppose information set here 1 e alarm content is as shown in figure 7 17 e Meaning of option Use if the option Use of some item is selected the alarm information can be displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar only when the corresponding address of the item is 1 if the option Use of some item is not selected the alarm information will not be displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar even if the corresponding address of the item is 1 1f the item address is 0 the alarm information will not display in Alarm Controls or Dynamic alarm bar no matter the option Use is selected or not We take examples to describe it in details in following content gt Suppose LB1 address value is 0 the alarm information will not display in Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar no matter the option Use is selected or not gt Suppose LB1 address value is and option Use is not selected the alarm information will display in neither Alarm Controls nor Dynamic alarm bar gt Suppose LB1 address value is 1 and option Use is selected the alarm information will display in both Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar Click OK to finish the setting of digital alarm Users can make six digit buttons the addres
274. r Range Assigned Bytes Int 2147483648 2 147483647 LLL Short int 2147483648 2 147483647 LLL Signed int 2147483648 2 147483647 aan Unsigned int 0 4294967295 EEEN Long int 922337203685477808 922337203685477807 Unsigned long 0 18446744073709551615 4 Integer variable declaration The general form of variable declaration type specifier variable name identifier Take examples as following int a b c a b c is integer variable long x y x y is long integer variable unsigned p q p q is unsigned integer variable Announcements in writing variables should be paid attention as following l Several same type of variables can be allowed to indicate after the same type specifier Space the variable names with comma There must be a space at least between the type specifier and variable name The last variable name must be ended with The variable declaration must be in front of variable usage It is always at the head of function body Practice lint a b short int c short d 100 a d 20 b a d 197 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 c atb d d d atc b 5 Float constant Real constant is also called float constant Real constant is also called float constant In the C language the float is indicated with decimal only It has two forms as following Decimal form and exponential form 1 Decimal form It is composed with figure 0 9 and decimal point For exam
275. r constant has no prefix Its value is 0 9 The followings are the legal decimal 237 568 65535 1627 The followings are the illegal decimal 023 prefix 0 is forbidden 23D contained non decimal codes In the program these notations are distinguished by prefix Therefore do not mistake the prefix in writing to avoid incorrect result 195 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 When the suffix of integer constant is on the 16 bit computer its basic integer is 16 bit Therefore the indicated figure value is limited The decimal unsigned constant is within 0 65535 and the signed range is 32768 32767 The unsigned octal number is ranged within 0 01777711 The unsigned hexadecimal number is within 0OXO0 OXFFFF or 0x0 OxFFFF If the figure is beyond the above range it must indicate with long integer The long integer is suffixed with L or 1 For example Decimal long integer constant 158L decimal 158 358000L decimal 358000 Octal long integer constant 012L decimal 10 077L decimal 63 O200000L decimal 65536 Hexadecimal long integer constant OXISL decimal 21 OXASL decimal 165 OXI10000L decimal 65536 There is no difference between long int 158L and basic int constant 158 As 158L 1s the long integer C compiling system will assign 4 bit space for storage As 158 is the long integer C compiling system will assign 2 bit space for storage Therefore pay attention to operati
276. r interface consistency and simple interfaces The layout of the menus is close to those of Windows system making it easy to learn so that project designers can easily develop suitable configurations for their projects using SamDraw The development interface and the functional areas are shown in Figure 2 23 latte har mema bar Ci Docuserie e M Acter dee Scroon f i alia Filet Miagi Fi r Brae iT Object Sereal Setting SS Deetlead ip Mel p iH O a a a cnn th IN t 2 amp LS OCT A BE 8 wie ORC he a SSBB Me k hk AG Peper Sheer aego E E g roJect Manager Tool Buttons Hd pereiar waehiing iy HI Staten Regional picture window EH FLE Cilral i Elezk Fide Freaet ion HI Pe ee i ee ora agi T Sar aD COG Sra eee Sore ack Tinea Ed Historical Data Logger l Alea Log i l Rje 84 3 P i Informati OIL output window Pordioates Laft 275 Tap 749 0 Sica Width POT g Eit 190 09 Figure 2 23 Interface and areas of the software Title bar Displaying version number of SamDraw Menu bar Displaying command menus of SamDraw All these menus are drop down menu Tool buttons Shortcut buttons of some commands Displaying corresponding buttons of file edit drawing and some other functions 39 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Picture area window A window for designers to configure and edit graphs Project manager Tree menu for c
277. r r gt s Display program result float s r wherein r 5 s PI r r This program is defined by macro definition directive before main function P1 is 3 14159 which substitutes for P1 in the program s PI r r is equivalent to s 3 14159 r r Pay attention symbol constant is not variable Its value can not be changed in the overall action scope That is to say assignment statement is forbidden to re assign in the program 5 1 2 Initial value of variable and type conversion 1 Initial value assignment for variable In the program it is usually to assign initial value for the variable There are many methods for initial value assignment in the language program which are called initialization In the variable declaration the general form of initial value assignment is Type specifier variable 1 1 variable 2 2 for example int a b c 5 float x 3 2 y 3f z 0 75 char chl K ch2 P 201 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Note no continuous assignment is forbidden in the declaration for instance a b c 5 is illegal Type conversion of variable The variable type is convertible There are two methods for conversion One is automatic conversion the other 1s forced conversion Automatic conversion When the different types of data are involved in hybrid operation the automatic conversion 1s completed by compilation system The auto conversion should conform to the following rules
278. r state of PLC register from MATSUSHITA FP series by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of MATSUSHITA FP series through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port Eatsushita FP Series Samkoon SA series touch screen Eis 0 0 0 CE A 000 eo 00000 L oY 9DIND female Matsushita FP Series 305 S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA MAT 1 J FPO CPU RS232 communication port 3 pin terminal Communication cable type CA MAT 2 V FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH CPU RS232 communication terminal 9 pin D male connector Communication cable type CA MAT 2 J FP1 CPU RS422 programming port FPEFEPU RS422 programming port 2 round Hirose 8PinfPort 306 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 OOO D0000 9DIND female Matsushita FP Senes Communication cable type CA MAT 3 2 Software setting The communication parameter of PLC should be consistent with touch screen J PLC address should be consistent w
279. r to have sound when the touch screen is touched Screen saver screen If this box is checked you can select a picture and set it to be the screen saver picture After the screen saver picture appears you can simply touch the screen to go back the original screen Load screen If this box is checked the selected loading picture will be displayed after power up of the touch screen and remain for set duration before the appearing of the start up picture This is to give some prompts or instructions to users In addition in this dialog you can also set user level password SamDraw totally provides 8 levels of password each password with 8 digits Users can set their own passwords basing on particular needs The default original passwords of level 1 8 are 1111 to 8888 and the default level is 1 3 2 2 Adding a graph object After completing new screen creation you can add desired objects or controls in the screen edit window SamDraw provides users with basic graph objects such as rectangle rounded rectangle line ellipse sector arc bit map polygon polygonal line and text and complex graph objects such as bit button word button numeric entry display button bar graph trend curve control alarm control and historical data collection It also provides graph object editing operations such as free movement zoom in out shape changing copy paste delete and align It fully supports drawing with keyboard and mouse and provides
280. r y is 121 Give x and y to character variable a and b a x b y Actually it is to store 120 and 121 BC in a and b untt a 0 1 1 I It 0 0 O 199 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 b O 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 Therefore they can be regarded as integer C language allows to give character value to integer variable and give integer to character variable as well It can output character variable as integer and output integer as character The integer is 2 byte and character is single byte When the integer is processed as character the low eight bytes are involved only Practice charint a 49 char b char d b a 10 d atb Practice char cl c2 cl a c2 b cl c1 32 c2 c2 32 9 Character string constant Character string constant is a character string included in double quotes For example CHINA C program 12 5 they are legal character string constants The character string constant is different from character constant Their differences are described as following 1 Character constant is included in single quotes while character string constant is included in double quotes 2 Character constant is single character only while character string constant contains one or several characters 3 A character can be given to a character variable but a character string constant can not In the C language there is no corresponding character string variable 4 The character c
281. ral PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Timeout 20 The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates that the touch screen pops up communication failure without corresponding recovery within 2 seconds Generally the defaults are adopted Address Standard It 1s valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Select ZHENGHANG Electronics and A5 series in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly If changes are needed it should be confirmed depending on PLC connection Please refer to ZHENGHANG Electronics PLC programming manual Operational address range Operational address is determined when a ZHENGHANG AS series PLC is connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs an extension module or other circumstances please refer to the instruction manual of ZHENGHANG AS series PLC Take A5 CPU226 as an example as following vw VW Vwo read write VW da 391 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 E ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal
282. ral designation of operation object and operation environment For example window part data graph and the like can be all referred to as object Choosing an object refers to the process of clicking a window or object to Choose an object make it operable The chosen object including window is also called current object Configuration refers to the process of defining preparing and editing Configuration objects in window environment and setting their status features properties 63 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 General designation of name type status performance and use of objects Aggregate of commands for certain functions For example File menu eae consists of commands used to process project files All menus of SamDraw are drop down menus and a drop down menu can be divided into several levels each level called a sub menu A button corresponding to a command Some command buttons are in tool Command button bar and some are in menus Switch the bit status of an object with bit status display to ON status Set OFF Switch the bit status of an object with bit status display to OFF status amp ackground a O O e A memory variable linked with the current object Connected device A device communicating with the current project Aggregate with certain special functions Table 2 3 Common terms 64 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configu
283. raph color and background color within preset range See Figure 4 82 Har Graph Low Limit High Limit 1000 k Low Color High Color FG Color 2mm FG Color ae BG Color ae BG baler ent Figure 4 82 Range tab of Bar Graph 150 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Range display Here you can set High Limit and Low Limit here If the Variable Range option is checked the values of the High Limit and Low Limit will be determined by the address of the register After these limits are set if the value of the monitor address is equal to or lower than the Low Limit after the project is downloaded to HMI the graph color and background color as defined in the Low Color will be used in the bar graph If the value of the monitored address is equal to or higher than the High Limit the graph color and background color as defined in the High Color will be used in the bar graph If the value of the monitored address is higher than the Low Limit and lower than the High Limit the graph color and background color as defined in the General tab will be used in the bar graph Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Visibility tab gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become AA Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 13 Time display Time Display control is mainly use
284. ratio of SA 4 3A is 16 9 and the resolution reaches 480x272 The length width ratio of SA 3 5A is 4 3 and the resolution reaches 320x234 Refer to technical parameter list for detailed parameters Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 J e 1 3 Product dimensions Installing dimension of SA 12 1A Figure 1 7 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 12 1 The outline dimension is 338x253x65 and the installing opening dimension is 328x245 oe ZEE we Bct Ss Front Sa i Be ia Be bz The back Installation opening size Figure 1 7 Installing dimensions of SA 12 1 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Installing dimension of SA 10 4 Figure 1 1 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 10 4A SA 10 4B The outline dimension is 312x225x54 and the installing opening dimension is 285x213 We CIC The back Figure 1 1 Installing dimensions of SA 10 4 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Installing dimension of SA 10 2A Figure 1 10 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 10 2A The outline dimension is 266x208x40 5 and the installing opening dimension is 260x202 266 mm uu g0 we sc uu zog The back Installation opening size Figure 1 10 Installing dimensions of SA 10 2A Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4Installing dimension of SA 8 Fig
285. ration Software User Manual V3 3 3 Basic steps of creating a project with SamDraw 3 1 Creating a new project with SamDraw To create a new project click the New Project command in File menu or the New Project button in the tool bar and then a pop up dialog for new project creation will appear Select a directory for project saving and choose a name for the project Choose the model of the touch screen corresponding to the project click OK to complete the creation and enter the communication port setting dialog Click Cancel to quit the dialog 3 1 1 New project dialog Project name The name of the project to be created Path Directory to save the new project file C in default Model Model of the touch screen used by the project Available models include SA 12 1A 800x600 12 1 SA 10 4A 800x600 10 4 SA 10 4B 640x480 10 4 SA 8A 640x480 8 0 SA 8B 800x600 8 0 SA 7A 800x480 7 0 SA 7B 800x480 7 0 SA 5 7A 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7B 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7C 320x234 5 7 SA 5 7D 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7E 640x480 5 7 SA 5 7F 320x234 5 7 SA 4 3A 480x272 4 3 SA 3 5A 320x234 3 5 65 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 The default model is SA 10 4A 800x600 10 4 Show model Display direction of the touch screen used by the project Available models include Horizontal Configuration with the touch screen being horizontal Vertical Confi
286. ration more convenient Create a new Multifunction Button or double click an existing Multifunction Button to enter the property dialog as Shown in 4 108 Bulti function ID AFOoOd Border Color Fiz Color Bi Color Pattern in Solid Available Functions Already add Functions _ m Setting Tata add User Input Woil Invert Figure 4 108 Multifunction Button dialog Function tab 1 Button appearance Here you can set shape color and pattern of the button 2 Available functions Multiple functions are listed for users to choose and the chosen function will be executed when the button 1s pressed 188 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Set Coil Set ON the address entered Reset Coil Set OFF the address entered Coil Turn Change the address entered to opposite If the bit is 0 change it to 1 if it is change it to 0 Screen Jump Jump to the chosen screen You can choose the target screen by changing this option Screen Index Jump to Start Screen Cy Forward Screen Sereen Index 0 Figure 4 109 Screen Jump dialog Setting Data Write the set data to the set address You can choose Data Type Write Address and Set Data to be written Function Set Data Data Type iB amp bit Tasi gmi W L Write Address wo 0 Set Data o Figure 4 110 Set Data dialog User Input Input a value and write it to the
287. rd When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from right to left Rightward When the value of the monitor address increases the bar rolls from left to right BG Color Background color of the bar graph Har Graph General Range Visibility BG Color i Direction Upward Downward C LeftWard Rightward Tata Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Monitor Address Min 0 IBSS35 Bipolar Bar Max Par Fattern sSelia w Bar FG Color MA Bar BG Color Figure 4 80 Bar Graph dialog Bipolar Bar Bars that can extend to both sides along with the change in the value of the data register For example if the Max is 100 the Min is 10 the Direction is Upward and this Bipolar Bar option is checked a Middle Value entry will appear and you can enter a number here as the mid point value For example if 70 1s entered then the bars change as shown in Figure 4 81 when the value of 149 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 the monitor address increases from 0 oc 100 110 Figure 4 81 3 Modifying bar graph Move the mouse to the bar graph and left click and then 8 small green dots will appear around the bar graph Move the mouse to a dot press down the left key and drag the mouse to change the size of the bar Range tab of Bar Graph This tab is mainly used to display the value of the monitor address with different g
288. reate in the current project a new screen Screen properties Used to open the property dialog of the current screen where name and background of the screen can be set Delete screen Used to delete the current screen Before deleting a screen please ensure that the screen to be deleted is the current screen and whether there are useful controls in the screen Deleted screens cannot be recovered by means of Undo Setting menu Setting menu consists of the following commands Preferences Setting P Alarm Setting A Recipe Setting R and File Protection M See Figure 2 30 eE DownloadiD Helg Freferences Setting FE Alarm Setting A d Recipe Setting RK File Protection M Macro Conver ter global Macro Initial Macro Figure 2 30 Setting menu Parameter settings By clicking this menu item you can open the parameter settings window where you can set and modify a range of parameters including the touch screen model mode startup screen screen saver time flash frequency alarm sound touch sound and initial grade and its password etc Alarm settings By clicking this menu item you can open the digital alarm window and analog alarm window where you can set parameters such as the volume of alarm sound time for scanning alarm and address for reading alarm etc 48 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Formula settings By clicking this menu item you ca
289. rectangle in the current screen g Corresponding to Polygon command used to draw a polygon in the current screen Corresponding to Text command used to draw a text box in the current screen for word inputting Corresponding to Table command used to create a table of specified number of rows and columns in the current screen Corresponding to Scale command used to draw required scales Corresponding to Open library command used to open the picture library of the SamDraw for use by the designers p Corresponding to Save graph command used to save a control or graph in the current screen ON Corresponding to ON 1 command used to set to ON status the graph objects in the current screen for which ON OFF status can be set OFF Corresponding to OFF 0 command used to set to OFF status the graph objects in the current screen for which ON OFF status can be set Corresponding to The forward screen command used to switch to the screen before the current screen 56 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt Corresponding to The backward screen command used to switch to the screen after the current screen Corresponding to Properties command used to open property page of the chosen key Corresponding to Lock command used to lock the chosen key in the screen so that
290. reens are slave station 1 The communication port RS232 connected with PLC connection method and system setting are as shown in figures 9 1 9 2 and 9 3 294 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 T SELCE ES 2342 COBBTHicatioa n port PLC is primary station ia ES 232 ES 485 converter Slave station 1 Slave station 2 Slave station 3 Saakoon SA The communicate port of all touch screens is sce ES 485 RS485 i 45 All touch screens are slave stations Figure 9 1 Schematic diagram of connection mode One device with multiple screens When PLC RS232 is primary station Communication Port Properties General Far ameter Link ID Link Name Link Type Direc t Connection erial Port Tee Mo dbus RW S1 ave Device Serveri Modbas 2 2 Link Port comi wa PLO contigaous address interval 16 Figure 9 2 Select MODBUS protocol and select to be slave station 295 S User Manual V3 3 henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software Communication Port Properties General Parameter Communication Parameters Baud rate Data bits Check Other HMI Address 3 PLO Address Communi cation Time 20 ims Stop Bits E v Retry Address Model Standard Mode v Figure 9 3 Distribute station address for touch screen 2 The communication port connected with PLC is RS485 with connection mode as
291. rements Recommended system tis recommended to use Windows XP SP2 as the operating system 2 2 2 Hardware requirements of SamDraw for computer The minimum hardware requirements of SamDraw are Pentium 3 800MHz computers at minimum For better performance Pentium 4 1GHz and 26 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 above are recommended Memory At least 64M for running in Windows 98 128M for running in Windows 2000 and 128M for running in Windows XP 256M or above is recommended Hard disk capacity at least 50M for installation of SamDraw 100M or above is recommended If there is not enough hard disk space SamDraw cannot be installed Graphics card Compatibility with Windows system graphics memory of 1MB or above allowing for running at 1024 768 or above 32 digit true color USB interface is required Two key mouse and keyboard If the computer configuration is lower than the above requirements SamDraw is likely unable to be installed and operated Recommended configuration CPU Intel Pentium 800 or above or equivalents Memory 256M or above Graphics card Compatibility with Windows system graphics memory of 1MB or above allowing for running at 1024 768 or above 32 digit true color Hard disk 40G or above 2 3 Installation of SamDraw configuration software SamDraw is a 32 digit application specially designed for standard Mic
292. reported when you click OK button 3 XY Axis tab See Figure 4 92 163 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Trend Chart E General Fen IY Axis Wisibility I Axis wl Show Ticks Show Ticks i Show E Axis Grid Axga Tick Color Axie Tick Color Grid Color Grid Color Wonber of Major f4 ai Wanber of Major Hanker of Sub Iinber of Sub Show Marks v Show Barks Font Suze i2 Font Sire 12 _ Win g Maz La Total Digiiz Fractional Digita Figure 4 92 XY Axis tab of Trend Chart X Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of X axis Show Y Axis Grid Defining whether to show grids of Y axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of X axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of X axis grids Number of Major Number of major ticks of X axis Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of X axis Show Marks Defining whether to show marks of X axis Y Axis Show Ticks Defining whether to show scales of Y axis Show X Axis Grid Defining whether to show grids of X axis Axis Tick Color Changing the color of Y axis tick Grid Color Changing the color of Y axis grids 164 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Number of Major Number of major ticks of Y axis Number of Sub Number of sub ticks of Y axis Show Marks Defining whether to show marks of Y axis Font Size Changing font size of marks on Y axis Min Minim
293. ress Suppose it is set to internal address LW1 here Select the total number of alarms in option Block Size 1 e total number of addresses The mode of read address has something to do with data type selected by users In the beginning each address is default to 16 digit data type The initially read address is continuous But users can alter the data type of each address As shown in figure 6 20 LW1 address value is selected to 32 digit positive integer and both LW3 and LW4 are 16 digit positive integer Therefore when selecting 32 digit data for some address the address read following is equal to previous address plus 2 if 16 digit data type is selected the address read following is equal to previous address plus 1 e Users can set the Scanning Time of analog alarm as required 1 e scanning frequency Click every item in list box Move mouse to right Limit and enter one data into it Then move mouse to the edit box Text in right module Message and enter the corresponding text information in the box i e alarm content Suppose the information set here i e alarm content is as Shown in figure 6 20 From this figure we can see that each address value can be divided into 4 areas i e data subarea of alarm address low low low high and high high In following content we take address LW1 for example to describe the meaning of these 4 areas all the 280 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Sof
294. ress set by the user is LW3 then the values of 5 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 Value of pen 1 LWS5S Value of pen 2 LW7 Value of pen 3 LW9 Value of pen 4 LW11 Value of pen 5 Thus if 32 digit data is chosen and the number of data is set to N then the values of N addresses adding 2 to the address each time can be read according to different address rules of the PLC Direction From left to right The pens lines move from left to right From right to left The pens lines move from right to left BG Color Background color of the area where the pens lines are moving Clear Trigger When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from 0 to 1 all current pens lines will be cleared When the value of the Clear Trigger address changes from to 0 or has no change no change will be made to the pens 2 Pen tab of Trend Chart See Figure 4 91 162 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Trend Chart Generali Fon EY Avie d Visibility Pen 1 Fen 2 E T Figure 4 91 Pen tab of Trend Chart In this tab you can set the maximum value minimum value line pattern and line color of each pen The data type of Max and Min is determined by the Data Type defined in General tab For example if you want to enter floating point numbers to Max and Min you must choose 32 digit floating point number in Data Type option in General tab Otherwise an error will be
295. rface 1 Click Static Picture icon in the tool bar and a dialog as shown in Figure 4 87 will appear 155 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Static Picture _ EE E gt EE gt _ gt LL L____A Static Picture t Fit to Object Ficture Ficture Library CO File Ficture Fath Link Figure 4 87 Static Picture dialog Link If this option is checked the path of the picture but not the picture itself will be saved so that the size of project file can be reduced Embed If this option is checked the picture will be saved in the project file This may increase the size of project file and reduce save access speed After a picture 1s chosen click OK and then the mouse will become N Press down the left key of the mouse on any point of the screen drag it to another position on the screen and then release the mouse to complete picture inserting The size of the picture inserted can be adjusted Choose the picture move the mouse to a small green dot press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to adjust the picture to a suitable size SamDraw supports a wide range of picture formats including JPG BMP JIF WMF EME and GIF 4 4 17 Picture display Picture Display is an extension of Static Picture control as Static Picture can only display one picture but Picture Display can display up to 32 pictures Picture Display can have different
296. rical alarm control of the touch screen 30 Page down alarm in historical alarm control Used to page down alarm information in historical alarm control of the touch screen 31 Move historical data upward Used to move historical data upward in historical data display control of the touch screen 32 Move historical data downward Used to move historical data downward in historical data display control of the touch screen 33 Page up historical data Used to page up historical data in historical data display control of the touch screen 34 Page down historical data Used to page down historical data in historical data display control of the touch screen Use Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the function button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list i After the system jumps to the system screen the system will close the current project When the system quits the system screen it will restart the project and enter the startup page set in the project i The Label tab of Function Button is the same as the Label tab of Bit Button except that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Function Button has only one state Thus you 129 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control f
297. ries PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor the PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with TP03 Series PLC through SMP X and CMM protocol How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port TPO3 Series WSDAP I Samkoon SA series touch screen Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 399 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 0000 00000 9DIND female connector 8DIN round male connector Communication cable type CA_TAIAN 1 2 Software setting Set the programming port to be TP03 protocol in PLC programming software PLC equipment address is 1 The communication parameters should be consistent with that of Samkoon touch screen Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of TP03 Series PLC The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port Baud rate Data bit length Stop bit length 400 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Parity check bit NONE PLC address l Operational address range read write Intermediate relay read write Data register 0 8511 read write Tddd Timer coil 0 511 read write T V
298. rk device through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application The supported PLC models of MODBUS include NEZA TWIDO series When the different PLCs are used be sure to select the PLC consistent with device type in the configuration NEZA series PLC communicates with Samkoon touch screen through MODBUS protocol The programming port is not allowed except the communication extension module or the f f self owned communication extension port Details refer to the relevant manual of MODBUS PLC e How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen 9 pin serial port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen VY Connect with PLC programming port through communication cable 316 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA MODICON 1 2 Software setting The communication mode of PLC must be RTU mode and the station address should be consistent with that of touch screen Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of SCHNEIDER PLC PLC communication parameters should be consistent with that of touch screen The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Commu
299. ro main Tag Setting No Data Type Tag name FLE BO Address Rew Information Output Window Figure 5 4 Macro Compiler Button Function Description Compile Compile the current macro source code and check the syntax error Function Insert the selected library function at the cursor location in the edition window of source code Close Close the current dialog box Description pop up the help instruction of macro usage Instructions 224 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Instruction 1 convention introduction of program compilation Create the source program of C language conforming to ANSI C standard in the edition window Instruction 2 information output window The window outputs the information of compilation and connection state of program Users may make debugging and modification according to the information prompt Instruction 3 close open window In the variable setting users can right click the edition window of source code and it will pop up the shortcut as Figure 5 5 window close open Click close display variable setting window and close display information output window to close open the corresponding window Users can adjust the edition box size as required Instruction 4 variable setting Variable name input the variable name required in the program Data class select the corresponding data class of variable name so as
300. rogram segment executed repeatedly is called loop body C language 215 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 provides many loop statements which may compose different loop structures iF While statement The general form of while statement While expression statement wherein the expression is loop condition and the statement is loop body Semanteme of while statement compute the expression value When the value is true not 0 the loop body statement is executed There are some points to be noted in while statement 1 The expression of while statement is usually the relational expression or logical expression As long as the expression value is true not 0 it can continue loop 2 If the loop body contains one or more statements 1t must be bracketed with to form the compound statement 3 Note the loop conditions to avoid endless loop Do while statement General form of do while statement do statement while expression Wherein the statement is loop body and the expression is the loop condition Semanteme of do while statement First execute the loop body statement for one time then judge the expression value If the value is true not 0 the loop is continuous otherwise the loop ends The difference between do while statement and while statement is that do while executes first and judges late Therefore do while will execute the loop body for one time at least But w
301. rosoft Windows systems Before installation of this software please confirm that the software and hardware of the computer meets the above mentioned minimum requirements Install SamDraw3 3 using the installation CD provided along with the product The detailed installation steps are as follows Start up Windows Place the CD into the CD drive The contents of the CD are shown in Figure 2 1 Please check the contents of the CD 27 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Ga TE E Readne tt Ser LA L or am h UT al L fad nn er z ealr ard 3 axe Setup Laswnche Figure 2 1 Contents of the installation CD If any part of the contents is missing please contact the Company and we will provide sincere service to you After inserting the CD a window of SamDraw installation program will pop up Open the CD directly and execute SamDraw3 3 exe Then an installation window as shown in Figure 2 2 will appear ra EA ES Y m se Pee Dee ae e rh ah ha 4 H rm A ae K ers Fi patel by Py boa ie er ram ae e a jaca a zH Pies s Emri e AHi EN Eg pares l Cees a peed ee ee Sere RA Tbe IRAE Soe wo a ess Re TO ee ee SamDraws SAL a AS AK fi Figure 2 2 Automatic running page In the installation window select Install SamDraw3 3 that is left click the red circle in Figure 2 2 to start in
302. rticular needs up to 32 states that is state 0 31 For example when 16 digit positive integer is chosen and the total states are 32 if the value in the monitored address is 0 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 0 if the value in the monitored address is 5 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 5 If the value in monitored address is 60 then the Multi state lamp displays the texts and picture of state 31 as the total number of states 1s 32 at most The data type should be the same as the type of the data to be indicated 2 Text Click Text tab in the Multi state lamp property dialog and then a property setting dialog as shown in Figure 4 67 will appear 133 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Bultistate Lamp General Text Picture Visibility Border Interval Attribute Font Size Color Ree Line Interval 0 ford Interval 0 Position Figure 4 67 Text tab of Multi state Lamp This tab is mainly used to set different texts for different states By default the texts of each state are 0 based increasing numbers and user can change such contents according to actual needs The steps are as follows Choose the state to be modified in the list and then type in the contents to be used in the edit box below In addition you can also modify Border Interval Font Size Font Color Line Interval Word Int
303. s 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screen Adopt defaults in general It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general communication period the unit is ms the defaults are used normally It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Select ADVANTECH distributed I O and ADAM 4017 ADAM 4060 in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly If changes are needed it should be confirmed depending on PLC connection Please refer to ADVANTECH PLC programming manual Operational address range Operational address is determined when an ADVANTECH distributed I O series PLC is connected to a
304. s the color 1s more vivid Besides SamDraw provides a larger picture library helping designers to design their configurations more conveniently and quickly After configuration is downloaded to the touch screen it has the same appearance as on PC screen without distortion of color and font Meanwhile SamDraw has very simple operation interface and the menu layout is similar to that of Windows It absorbs and integrates the advantages of many major visual configuration software and touch screen configuration software helping users to configure high performance and high quality project documents 2 Complete functions SamDraw has complete functions including basic shape drawing coloring text preparation system picture library animated display bitmap status change trend picture display alarm control and the like SamDraw V3 3 adds dynamic circle dynamic rectangle instruments historical data collection address searching off line simulation and some other new functions Designers can easily design schemes and configuration basing on their own requirements and characteristics of projects and can achieve satisfactory effects 25 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 3 Communication SamDraw provides drives for communication with PLCs projects of all major manufacturers in the world such as Siemens Mitsubishi Omron Fuji Panasonic Schneider and Emerson Meanwhile the Company can also develop ind
305. s touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Checkout Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Stop bit Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station Touch screen address and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screens Adopt defaults in general PLC address It 1s valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Timeout 20 The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates that the touch screen pops up communication failure without corresponding recovery within 2 seconds Generally the defaults are adopted Address standard It 1s valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general 371
306. se to be screen 1 enter unlock password in option Unlock Protection Password suppose to be 1111 Now setting of level 1 HMI protect is finished gt As above click 2 button icon select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting suppose to be 2009 04 05 enter application time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppose to be screen 2 enter unlock password in option Unlock Protection Password suppose to be 2222 Now setting of level 2 HMI protect is finished gt As above click 3 button icon 3 select application date in column Time limit of Parameter Setting suppose to be 2009 04 10 enter application time in next column suppose to be 12 00 00 select the prompt screen when time limit is reached in option Prompt Screen suppose to be screen 3 enter unlock password in option Unlock Protection Password suppose to be 3333 Now setting of level 3 HMI protect is finished gt Click OK when the setting of level 3 HMI protect is finished Suppose today is 2009 04 01 08 00 00 Therefore the time limit for level 1 HMI protect is 2009 04 01 12 00 00 There is some time before the time limit Therefore HMI still can be used normally Suppose after 4 hours 1 e to 2009 04 01 12 00 00 HMI will automatically skip to the screen 1 set by user in advance If user wants to continue to use th
307. sed to set whether to display or hide the control See Figure 4 58 118 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 fit Button Ganeral Label Advanced Visibility Controlled by Bit Lowest Visible User Level Ca Figure 4 58 Visibility tab of Bit Button Controlled by bit When this option is checked if the Effective State is 1 then the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 1 if the Effective State is 0 then the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the value of the Control Bit is 0 Controlled by User Level When this option is checked and an Effective Minimum Level is chosen the Bit Button can be displayed on the touch screen when and only when the current user level is equal to or higher than the Effective Minimum Level al If neither of these two options is checked the control will be always displayed on the touch screen gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become iL rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 119 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 4 2 Word button Word Button can be used to enter fixed value numeric value and password into the data register and execute adding subtracting operations for the values in the register The
308. series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of GE FANUC PLC register by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of GE FANUC PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate and monitor the PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with GE FANUC PLC through SMP X and CMM protocol How to establish connection with PLC 1 Hardware connection Saakoon 9 pin serial port WSDAPI Samkoon SA series touch screen f 00 ooooo 9DIND female connector 396 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication cable type CA GE 1 2 Software setting Set the programming port to be GE FANUC PLC in PLC programming software The communication parameters should be consistent with that of Samkoon touch screen Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of GE FANUC PLC The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l Parity check bit Odd PLC address 0 Operational address range Q 10000 read write Yddd WO output point M 110000 _ readwrite Mddd Secondar
309. ses of which are respectively LB1 LB6 and all function of which is selected to Alternative Put one Alarm Controls and one Dynamic alarm bar controls on screen and carry out off line simulation for them Click some digit button to see whether alarm information 1s displayed in Alarm Controls and Dynamic alarm bar The example of off line simulation is carried out as shown in figure 7 18 211 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Samkoon LBS OFF LBG ON Figure 7 18 Off line simulation example of digit alarm In figure 6 18 an Alarm Controls is put in screen The number of its text lines is set to 7 and other attribute values are default Then a Dynamic alarm bar is put Its attribute setting is as shown in figure 7 19 278 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Alarm Har General Visibility Ip ABOOOO Border Color i hap Message Bis Color ee Fis Color Fattern I Solia Text Font Size Text Color Attribute Speed 5 Direction Left Right Alarm sort Time CO By Time Reversal Figure 7 19 Dialog box for attribute setting of dynamic alarm bar Six digit button controls are put finally The write address of digit button controls is LB1 LB6 And Alternative Monitoring and Monitoring address is same to write address are set for each digit button contro
310. set address You can choose Data Type and Write Address When this function is executed a data entering dialog will appear you can enter data of chosen type in the dialog and then the data will be written to the set address 189 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Function User Input 32 bit Unsign Write Address Lal Figure 4 111 User Input dialog Choose a function and click Add to add it to the list of chosen functions 3 Functions added When you choose a function it is displayed in the Functions Added area Double click it or click Modify to set or modify it and click Delete to delete it During operation of the configuration all these function chosen will be executed when the Multifunction Button is pressed 4 Macro When Use Macro is chosen there will be a list of available macros Choose a macro and then it will be also executed when the Multifunction Button is pressed Label Advanced and Visibility tabs Refer to Bit Button for introduction of Label Advanced and Visibility tabs K Each Multifunction Button can contain 7 functions at most and can contain only one User Input function 4 6 Operation of SamDraw controls SamDraw 3 3 provides basic controls of powerful functions When creating a control along with creation of a configuration project the control will be displayed in User Area and you can change its properties by double clicking or using the right cl
311. set as shown in figure 7 14 the data type and scaling or not of LHO LH4 are set as follows other attributes are default value LHO 16 positive integer select scaling gain 3 offset 2 LH1 32 positive integer select scaling gain 2 offset 1 LH2 16 integer not select scaling LH3 32 integer not select scaling LH4 floating number select scaling gain 4 offset 5 After completion of setting we have set Read Address to be LW1 and Sample Length to be 5 in general page previously Therefore we have to read five groups of address value continuously starting from Read Address The concrete address to be read depends on the data type of each item in page Data Item If the data type of each item is set to 16 digits the sampled address is continuous if data type is 32 digits the sampled address is discontinuous If Scaling is selected for some item the finally sampled value read address value x gain offset If the data type and scaling of each item has been set addresses to be read are respectively as follows LHO LW1 16 digit data read address 1 LHO final value LW1 address value x3 2 LH1 LW2 32 digit data read address 2 LH1 final value LW2 address value x2 1 LH2 LW4 16 digit data read address 1 LH2 final value LW4 address value LH3 LW5S 32 digit data read address 2 LH3 final value LW5 address value LH4 LW7 32 digit data read address 2 LH4 final value LW1 address value lt 4 5
312. software PLC device address is 1 and transmission mode is RTU The communication parameter should be consistent with that of Samkoon touch screen All settings are recommended as following Detailed setting refers to the relevant technical manual of EMERSON The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are shown as following Configuration Item Recommendation Communication port RS232 Baud rate 19200 Data bit length 8 Stop bit length l 310 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Parity check bit Even PLC address l Operational address range Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not 5 The operation control switch is ON or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 311 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be conn
313. splay is similar to Picture tab of Multi state Lamp so you can refer to the latter for reference lt Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become AA Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 5 Advanced controls of SamDraw 4 5 1 GIF display GIF Display can be used to display animated pictures in GIF format up to 32 frames The operation steps are as follows Click GIF Display icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in 4 89 will appear 158 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 GIF Display _ Teneral Advanced Visibility ID GnOod Picture BSSS37SST0 gi View Run Testing Figure 4 89 GIF Display dialog After a picture is chosen click OK and then the mouse will become N Press down the left key of the mouse on any point of the screen drag it to another position on the screen and then release the mouse to complete picture inserting Click Advanced tab to enter Advanced properties setting page See Figure 4 118 159 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 GIF Display General Advanced Visibility Touch Availability v Controlled by Bit Control Bits x5 Avallable State 1 sy Figure 4 89 Adva
314. ss Total 4 High Low Byte Swap Alignment C Left Center Ri ght Figure 4 77 ASCII Character Display dialog 145 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 In this dialog you can set the monitor address of the connected device to be displayed font size of the texts to be displayed and some other properties Logs Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern If Transparent option is chosen the BG color setting will be ineffective l Refer to Bit Button control for use of the Visibility tab gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become K Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 11 ASCII character entry Click ASCII Character Entry icon z in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 78will appear 146 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ASCII Character Entry General Advanced Visibility Border Color BG Color Text Color FG Color Pattern Selid e Moni tor t Moni tor Address Identical to Write Address Total Ret e iB High Low Byte Swap Alignment O Left Center Figure 4 78 ASCII Character Entry dialog Write address The address where the ASCII texts entered by the user will be saved Macro If Use Macro option is
315. ssion or logical expression Expression 3 it is usually for modifying the value of loop variable and it is assignment statement These three expressions may be comma expression That is to say each expression can be composed with several expressions Three expressions are options and can be omitted The statement in general form is loop body statement Semanteme of for statement is 1 First calculate the value of expression 1 2 Then compute the value of expression 2 If the value is true not 0 loop body is executed once more otherwise exit the loop 3 Calculate the value of expression 3 and return to execute step 2 again During the for process expression is calculated for one time and expression 2 and 3 may repeat for several times The loop body may be executed for many times or not executed There are several points to be noted in for statement 1 Each expression in for statement can be omitted but the semicolon must exist For example lt gt for expression expression expression is omitted lt 2 gt for expression expression expression is omitted lt 3 gt for expression expression all expression is omitted 217 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 When the loop variable has assigned initial value Expression may be omitted as shown in Example 3 27 If Expression 2 or 3 is omitted the endless loop may be caused In this case the loop should be ended in loop body
316. st tome Birt Ton Bit tons Fist toma Hist om i E Irndicatgr Lit Indicator Indicator Indicator Irndicatord Indicators G The directior The direct The dirset Retating Libr b Digital Fran Tigital Fr Digital Fr Tigital Fr Article Fr aeitch Librat E Logu Library _ Miser ane ain fa Figure 4 49 Library list 109 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt The picture library of SamDraw provides users with abundant graph objects and in SamDraw3 3 many additional buttons indicator lights and other graph objects are added Designers can easily find desired graph objects in the library saving much time in configuration To choose a graph object you can first click the brief major categories on the left side of the library click to unfold the detailed classes under the major categories and then choose a desired graph object in the right area After that click OK to close the Library List dialog Then in the picture editing window the mouse will become K Move the mouse to a position where the graph object will be displayed left click the mouse and drag it to another appropriate position before left clicking again The system will automatically draw the corresponding graph 4 3 14 Build library p Choose Build Library command in Draw menu or click Build Library command button in the tool buttons and then a Library List dialog will pop up See Figure 4
317. stallation In the welcome window you can also install USB drive program view the CD read user manual access the website of the Company via the hyperlink and view contact information of the Company You can quit installation by clicking the Exit button on the right bottom corner After starting up the installation program select the next step in the pop up dialog box to proceed Alternatively you can also cancel the installation and exit the installation program See Figure 2 3 Before installation please confirm that SamDraw3 2 or earlier releases have been uninstalled or normal use of SamDraw3 3 may be impacted 28 Users can fill in their own personal or company information or choose the default setting and S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 pt ia A a oe ee ee a Reve A SesDrav3 3 InstallShield Tirard URON eC ef seek ent hs oS Benes andy aw3 SEI W es Figure 2 3 Installation window In the license agreement dialog please select whether to accept the software clauses and click next See Figure 2 4 Same raw 3 InstallShield Fizara RAMES 23 3 sen BMA 2008710818 aitrirae Mais SenDr anita st SRR IEA Figure 2 4 Agreement accepting page then click next See Figure 2 5 29 S henzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 SamDrawi 3 InstallShield Wizard EPRA WASHER APS w XXX
318. states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only and the movement range should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional reverse horizontal moving along the X axis The graph moves in horizontal direction only and the movement range should be between the X Coordinate Floor and the X Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Proportional reverse vertical moving along the Y axis The graph moves in vertical direction only and the movement range should be between the Y Coordinate Floor and the Y Coordinate Ceiling The total states are the value of LW1 and the X coordinate is the value of LW2 Li Refer to the introduction of Multi state Lamp control for setting of Text and Picture tabs Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab The position of graphics move can be controlled through the value of the last two digits of the monitor address Maximum X Y coordinate is the maximum size of the screen 4 5 10 Meter Meter control can display the value of the current linked variable using a pointer needle Generally a meter 1s a semicircle or circle Use of meter helps to show variables visually The steps to insert Meter c
319. system air conditioning industry processing machines tire industry monitoring and control equipments teaching instruments advanced manufacturing system and equipments and general equipment control industries The Company has become leading in the domestic market and won wide favorable comments of users by virtue of excellent product quality stable software operation and powerful product functions SamDraw generic industrial automation configuration editing software is a kind of configuration software used to quickly construct and generate embedded computer monitoring and control system Based on the Company s rich experience in configuration software development and application over the years this software uses currently advanced computer software technology uses window as the unit constructs graphical interfaces for user operation system and provides users with engineering solutions through field data collection and processing and by means of animated drawings alarm processing flow control report output and so on It is widely used in automation field To help users use SamDraw generic industrial automation configuration editing software we wrote this manual to introduce in detail the system structure functions and other aspects of SamDraw 3 3 Users can construct their own configurations by a few simple operations and get rid of fussy programming With this software more users can use human machine interface products masterly Th
320. t the bottom of the touch screen meeting relevant industrial design standards 12 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 1 4 1 Power supply The power supply interface of Samkoon SA series touch screen is located in the back panel It uses DC24V power supply 15 and isolated power input effectively shielding from interference and enhancing the anti interference capability of the whole system Figure 1 7 is a view of the power supply module Figure 1 7 Power supply module 1 4 2 Front panel Figure 1 8 is a view of the front panel of Samkoon SA series touch screen The front panel consists of the display screen and the operation indicator lights gt Indicator light r a Ansplay screen Figure 1 8 Front panel of SA series 1 4 3 Communication interfaces The communication interfaces of the touch screen are located in the bottom panel of the machine 2 standard serial communication interfaces are provided in SA 12 1A SA 10 4A SA 10 4B SA 8A SA 8B SA 7A SA 5 7A SA 5 7B and SA 5 7C and 1 standard serial communication interface is provided in SA 4 3A and SA 3 5A 9 pin D type interfaces are used for connection and communication with PLC or other controller When shielded cables are used the communication distance of RS232 should be no more than 15m A USB communication interface 1s provided for connection with PC for configuration downloading with a communication rate up to 10Mbps
321. t RS485 signal into RS232 signal ol When Samkoon SA series touch screen is selected to be primary station in mode one screen with multiple devices the address mode of touch screen as primary station have to be set to Expanded Mode 301 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 SamDraw Device Driver This Chapter will introduce the device connected with Samkoon touch screen in details It is important to set I O driver of device for configuration Samkoon touch screen 1s connected with PLC Samkoon series touch screen can be connected with most PLC from manufacturers in the world for communication such as MITSUBISHI OMRON SIEMENS AB SCHINEIDER The I O driver of different PLC for each manufacturer is made into file When the users specify a PLC in establishing item the system will know what drivers to be used and other complicated programming is not required by engineering designer SamDraw can read and write different types of registers or relays of PLC with convenient operation There are several operation methods as read only write only and read write to satisfy your requirements To provide convenience for connecting different devices Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd is able to develop the suitable communication driver for customer devices depending on their demands Any customers with requirements can contact with Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd
322. t and the ending point is a diamond dot This indicates that a curve arc has been preliminarily drawn Move the mouse to the starting point or the ending point a dotted line will appear The ending point of the dotted line is a square dot Move the mouse to this dot and then the mouse will become press down the left key of the mouse move it to an appropriate position and release it to get desired radian In addition you can also move the starting point or the ending point to an appropriate position See Figure 4 30 Figure 4 30 Drawing a curve arc gt After completing the above steps the curve arc has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the curve arc and double click or click Properties 97 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 rh button in the tool bar after choosing the curve arc At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear gt You may adjust the properties of the curve arc using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for curve arc 4 3 4 Free line Choose Free Line command in Draw menu or click Free Line command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape wil
323. t that controls the macro so that when the value of this bit is 1 the macro will be executed Frequency Execution frequency of the chosen macro from 0 1 to 60s Run times This option defines how many times the macro will be run If 0 is set here the macro 185 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 will be always executed Function Function Type Here you can choose the type of the function to be executed In SamDraw3 3 the function controlled by Timer is macro Name Name of the macro to be executed No Timer can be set if there is no macro at present al The size of Timer cannot be changed but its position can be set Timer control will not be displayed on HMI during project execution 4 5 15 Data transfer Data Transfer is used for transfer of data between PLC and HMI or between PLC and PLC Click Data Transfer in Project Manager and the current data transfer list will appear See Figure 4 106 Data Transfer Last Source LEQ Destination LB0 Noda Bit gg sa juency is Transfer data size l Source LYG stestination LNO Mada Wo trigrered piene Je Transfer data sisecl Delete Figure 4 106 Data transfer list This list shows the details of all current data transfers and you can carry out New Delete and Alter operations SamDraw3 3 supports up to 10 data transfers at the same time Create a new Data Transfer or double click an existing Data Transfer to enter t
324. t these operations and a curve connection line can be drawn After a desired curve connection line is drawn right click the mouse to complete See Figure 4 34 Figure 4 34 Drawing a curve connection line gt As shown in Figure 4 34 in the curve drawn the starting point is a green dot the ending point is a diamond dot and the middle nodes are square dots This indicates that a curve has been preliminarily drawn Move the mouse to the starting point or the ending point a dotted line will appear The ending point of the dotted line is a square dot Move the mouse to this dot and then the mouse will become press down the left key of the mouse move it to an appropriate position and release it to get desired radian In addition you can also move the starting point or the ending point to an appropriate position gt After completing the above steps the curve connection line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the curve connection line and double click or rp click Properties button in the tool bar after choosing the curve connection line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear 100 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 gt You may adjust the properties of the curve arc using the pull down and fine tu
325. te screen Delete Screen command is used to delete a screen in the current project The steps are as follows Choose Delete Screen in Screen menu or click the screen to be deleted in the Screen option in the Project Manager and right click it to call the right click menu and then click Delete option Besides you can also move the mouse to a blank space in the screen and right click the mouse to call the right click menu and choose Delete option in the menu After that a dialog as shown in Figure 4 4 will appear 81 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Figure 4 4 Screen deletion confirmation Click OK to complete the deletion operation A Deleted screen can never be recovered Thus be careful to execute this command 4 1 4 Copy screen Copy Screen command is used to copy the screen in the current project The steps are as follows Click the screen to be copied in Screen options in the Project Manager right click it to call the right click menu and then choose Copy option in the menu Then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 5 will appear Input the name in this dialog and click OK to complete copying You can click Cancel to cancel the copy operation Copy the current screen x Screen Hame The name of the complex picture Figure 4 5 Copy screen 4 2 Graph editing commands of SamDraw 4 2 1 Assemble and disassemble Assemble command is a group command us
326. ter RWI0 4095 Ox 03 Ox 06 Ox 10 4096 4096 Recipe register 366 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 19 Connection between Koyo series PLC and Samkoon series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of Koyo PLC by Samkoon series touch screen It uses standard CCM protocol It establishes serial communication connection with the communication port of Koyo PLC series PLC through the serial device in touch screen so as to operate PLC device Please read the relevant technical specification for communication unit and PLC device before the driver application Any Koyo PLC supporting CCM protocol can be connected with Samkoon touch screen e How to establish connection with Koyo PLC 1 Hardware connection 9 pin serial RODBUS CONTROLLER Samkoon SA series touch screen VJ Koyo PLC programming port PORT2 j a n i one _ E X OOo M O ar De k F 9DIND male 6 pin RJ 11 female pin configuration 367 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 2 Software setting PLC communication mode must be CCM mode and the station address is consistent with that of touch screen Detailed settings refer to the relevant technical manual of CCM protocol from Koyo PLC communication parameter should be consistent with that of touch screen The recommended communication parameters for touch screen are defined as f
327. ter display command used to draw in the current screen a numeric display box showing ASCII character words l 2 Corresponding to ASCII character entry command used to draw in the current screen an ASCII character display and entry box for inputting ASCII character words u Corresponding to Bar graph command used to insert in the current screen bar graph controls You can use up and down or left right movement of bars to observe the change in the value of the monitored address Corresponding to Time display command used to insert in the current screen a time control to display time Corresponding to Date display command used to insert in the current screen a date control to display date E day of week control to display day of week Corresponding to Day of week display command used to insert in the current screen a Corresponding to Static picture command used to insert in the current screen a static picture from local disk Corresponding to Picture display command used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying several pictures 58 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 am Corresponding to GIF display command used to draw in the current screen a picture display box displaying static or animated 32 frames pictures with an extension name of GIF Corresponding to Trend ch
328. the control will be displayed 4 4 6 Miulti state lamp Multi state Lamp is mainly used to display different states according to the value of the monitored address up to 32 states Click the multi state Lamp button icon 8 in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 66 will appear Bultistate Lamp General Text i Picture Visibility 1D a Shape State 0 Border Color al FG Lolor d AG Color J Pattern L seiia Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Monitor Address Total States 3 Figure 4 66 Multi state Lamp dialog 1 General 132 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Ma Refer to Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern When 32 digit data type is chosen for multi state Lamp the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address Data type Here you can choose different data types according to the value of the register address monitored Monitor address The register address where the monitored data are saved Total states Here you can set the total number of states basing on pa
329. the software It also introduces in detail the composition of the software system and the functions of each component helping users to understand the overall structure framework of SamDraw configuration software In addition it introduces the hardware and software requirements of SamDraw and the installation process and working environment of SamDraw helping users to learn use of this software and create application projects 2 1 What is SamDraw SamDraw configuration software is the configuration visual development system of Samkoon SA series touch screens produced by Shenzhen Samkoon Automation Technology Co Ltd As integrated development environment software it has abundant and powerful development functions SamDraw adopts the advantages of Windows system with high user interface consistency and simple interfaces The layout of the menus is close to those of Windows system making it easy to learn so that project designers can easily develop suitable configurations for their projects using SamDraw Its function and structure features can help users to shorten the process of developing automation projects and the process of system upgrading and maintenance It provides seamless integration with third party applications effectively enhancing the productivity Functions and features of SamDraw are as follows 1 Screen display The color of Samkoon touch screens reaches 260 000 pigment and compared with the products of other manufacturer
330. tion Software User Manual V3 3 Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Shape Border Color FG Color BG Color and Pattern Refer to the introduction of Multi state Lamp control for setting of Text and Picture tabs Refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for setting of Advanced and Visibility tabs gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become K Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 4 4 8 Numeric display Numeric Display control is a common control used to display the data saved in the data register of PLC or other connected devices such as speed current pressure and the like Click Numeric Display icon in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 70 will appear 137 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Hameric Display General Advanced Visibility EO Fiz Color Border Color BG Color Text Color Pattern Data Type 1B Bit Unsigned Int Display Type 18 Bit Unsigned Decimal Monitor Address Ali goment Justification Font General Font eg OC Left Zero Suppres Font Size if Center E Leading Zero Total Digits 4 Fractional Digits oO Ri Leading Space Figure 4 70 Numeric Display dialog In this dialog you can set the data register address of the PLC or other con
331. tion line rp connection line At this moment a property dialog similar to that in line drawing will appear and double click or click Properties button in the tool bar after choosing the straight gt You may adjust the properties of the free line using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 line types 10 line widths and 6 line end arrows for straight connection line 99 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 3 6 Curve connection line Choose Curve Connection Line command in Draw menu or click Curve Connection Line command button a in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw curve connection line in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a curve connection line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a line automatically Then left click the mouse and release gt Atthis moment the mouse shape is still a cross Move the mouse to another position where you want to set the end of the curve arc press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to move in the screen Then release the mouse Now the mouse shape 1s still a cross Repea
332. tion unit and PLC device before the driver application Samkoon SA series only support communication with ADVANTECH ADAM 4017 and ADAM 4060 PLC How to establish connection 1 Hardware connection Connect with PLC through programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen ADAM 4017 ADAM 4060 RS232 port RS485 communication port D female connector terminal 2 Software setting Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model ADVANTECH Select the corresponding PLC for different models At ADAM 4017 present Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports ADAM 4060 ADAM 4017 and ADAM 4060 from ADVANTECH Communication Adopt standard RS485 serial communication port Baud rate Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted 393 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Touch screen address PLC address Communication time Address Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provide
333. to distribute the corresponding memory size Word length set the occupied memory of corresponding variable automatically depending on the data class Read write set the read write property of variable in the memory cell of touch screen Address the defined physical memory address of variable in the touch screen Select ALL Copy Paste Shear Delete Revocation Open Close Tag Settings dialog Open Close Information output window Figure 5 5 Shortcut menu Variable setting instruction when the external requires interaction with touch screen 225 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 such as data exchange and data acquisition it provides the interface to change the behavior characteristics of touch screen dynamically Special tips the variables required in the program should be put in the variable definition part the variable definition starts from code 5 3 4 How to insert library function in the program Click function button and pop up the dialog box as Figure 5 6 Select the corresponding library function in the function name list box click confirm button and the function will be inserted to the cursor location of edition window automatically The functions parameter types and other detailed instruction of library function refer to Appendix l Function Function Hame ADIS UM ADDSUNC 1 Description Use addition to calculate checksum
334. ton in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 102 will appear General tab FG Color Click the color in the box to change the foreground color of the Display Border Color Click the color in the box to change the border color of the Display Grid Define whether to display grids and the color of grids Vertical If this option is checked vertical grids will be displayed indicated by a green tick in front if no indicated no display Horizontal If this option is checked horizontal grids will be displayed indicated by a green tick in front if no indicated no display Title Bar Here you can set Font Size Font BG Color Text Color and whether to display time and date Data Here you can set Font Size Text Color and maximum Rows Data tab Checked columns will be displayed indicated by a green tick in the box if no indicated no display 180 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Histroric Record Display General Data Visibility ID frog i Data Font Size Text Color ae I5 A FG Color Korder Color J Rows Grid Title bar Font Size Vertical e Hori font al Font Color O BG Color Text Color e Time Display Y Iate Display Figure 4 102 Historic Record Display dialog l Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab d At present the system does
335. tools for changing color shape and filling properties of graph objects SamDraw adopts object oriented programming techniques so that users can conveniently construct graph interfaces of screen You can simply use the graph objects provided by the system to complete picture generation just like constructing building blocks Meanwhile it allows for graph object copying between screens so that you can use the results of previous development repeatedly SamDraw also provides abundant bit maps for users helping to reduce the time consumption Figure 3 7 shows an example of project configuration after adding of graph objects 71 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ost Bocumenie acl Sel linps admire aloe y a JALA conf eee 201 L098 0S ee Pe eee File Ri Edit Hi View Deere Ql Object Sereen Setting Desolood 2 Help ee Oe ee cn i oe Sec cle ee ee ae ey eae INS 24 FOC AW E a 2 ofa esfas Ada Si aim DESBASTA GRR AA he kD eee eo mAder as SS S98 B33 m Frajeri Banas ae mi fs Link Ea copate CIAA E Setting HMI porgeeter setting k HHI Status fee PLO Control AY Clock Pale Fretazii ert HWI Frotection im AE Oi sA O02 YL o 003 761 bos PERG 005 SB 0O 0058 eee 0 007 g an Rs ee H hta eee 5 ono Jae findi HI hietaa Nake tore pS Crardianstes Lefi Figure 3 7 An example of project configuration 3 3 Downloading SamDraw configurati
336. touch screen as primary station have to be set to Expanded Mode 9 2 Connection mode of one screen with multiple devices between Samkoon SA series touch screen and PLC Samkoon SA series touch screen can not only be connected in mode one device with multiple screens but also can connect with PLC in the form of one screen with multiple device through MODBUS communication protocol which means that one touch screen can directly operate the register address of multiple PLCs connected with it only if PLC supports MODBUS communication protocol At the time of system setting it is necessary to select Modbus RTU for option Device Server and Modbus RTU Master in right area in option General of communication port attribute of touch screen making touch screen be primary station and all PLCs be slave station Using touch screen to operate register address means to operate the corresponding register address in PLC supporting MODBUS protocol All register names of PLC supporting MODBUS protocol can correspond to the register name in MODBUS protocol The connection method and system setting of touch screen are as shown in figures 9 8 9 9 and 9 10 Touch screen is PLC as slave station 1 primary station ES 485 signal ES 485 signal FLE ES 485 COBBUnicatio ES 485 signal Slave Station 3 SSE FLC ES 485 COBEBUnIcatio ES 232 signal I ES 2 327 E5 485 converter et Slave station 4
337. touch screen is the slave station and connected to several SA series touch screens together with PLC Please refer to the connection description of one unit with several screens Adopt defaults in general PLC address l It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Touch screen address The unit is 0 1s 20 indicates that the touch screen pops up communication failure without corresponding recovery within Timeout 2 seconds Generally the defaults are adopted Address standard It is valid only when SA series touch screen is the slave station and connected to several PLCs together with SA series touch screens Please refer to the connection description of one screen with several units Adopt defaults in general Select IDEC and FC series PLC in the drop down list of device service Adopt the default setting of parameter If the PLC programming communication port is set with parameters the setting of parameter options should be changed accordingly If changes are needed it should be confirmed depending on PLC connection Please refer to IDEC PLC programming manual Operational address range Operational address is determined when an IDEC MICRO Smart FC series PLC is connected to a SA series touch screen If there occurs an exte
338. ttern You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the rectangle and double click or click Properties button r Figure 4 36 will appear in the tool bar after choosing the rectangle At this moment a property dialog as shown in 101 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Kectangle e Line Type 1 w Line Width 1 Line Color TE l Fad Pattern C Solid a F Background Color Foreground Color Figure 4 36 Rectangle properties dialog gt You may adjust the properties of the rectangle using the pull down and fine tuning button SamDraw provides 15 frame line types 10 frame line widths and 21 filling patterns for rectangle to make the graph more beautiful and vivid See Figure 4 37 Figure 4 37 An example of a rectangle drawn 4 3 8 Ellipse Circle Choose Ellipse Circle command in Draw menu or click Ellipse Circle command button in the tool buttons and then move the mouse to the picture editing window At this moment the mouse shape will become a cross and now you can draw ellipse circle in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where an ellipse circle will be drawn left click the mouse or press down and hold and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This 102 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 dot will be the left top starti
339. tting of PLC or other connected devices to the current recipe by touching this button on the touch screen Move alarm upward Used to set the function of the Function Button to move alarm upward Then you can move the alarm contents one position upward by touching this button on the touch screen to display the required alarm contents Move alarm downward Used to set the function of the Function Button to move alarm downward Then you can move the alarm contents one position downward by touching this button on the touch screen to display the required alarm contents Page down alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to page down alarm Then you can page down the alarm contents by one page by touching this button on the touch screen to display the required alarm contents Page up alarm Used to set the function of the Function Button to page up alarm Then you can page up the alarm contents by one page by touching this button on the touch screen to display the required alarm contents Tune coordinates Used to set the function of the Function Button to tune coordinates Then you can enter the coordinate tuning page to tune coordinates by touching this button on the touch screen The steps to tune coordinates are as follows Enter the coordinate tuning page and then three icons will appear on the screen touch these icons to adjust the coordinates and finally restart System para
340. ture from the library or graph files move in specified direction basing on linked variables or trigger variables With this control you can realize animation effect on the screen The steps to insert Graphics Move control and modify its properties are as follows Click Graphics Move button in the tool bar set parameters in the pop up dialog and then click OK See Figure 4 98 Picture selection Choose in Picture tab a picture from the library or a user defined picture Monitor address Monitored address linked with Graphics Move Three addresses are occupied respectively corresponding to change of total states X axis value and Y axis value For example if the monitor address set is LW1 and the data type is 16 digit number then the monitor address for total states is LW1 that for X axis is LW2 and that for Y axis is LW3 that is change in the value of LW1 LW2 and LW3 can respectively control the total states movement along X axis and movement along Y axis If the data type 1s 32 digit then the monitor addresses for total states X axis and Y axis are respectively LW1 LW3 and LWS 175 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Graphics Hove General Test Picture Visibility Shape State 0 Border Color Fi Color By Color Pattern sotia Read Address Data Type 16 Eit Unsigned Int Monitor Address Attribute 3 Total States l Path Do the horizontal directi
341. tware User Manual V3 3 option Use for four options of address LW1 is selected as shown in figure 7 21 The limit for option High H of LW1 is 150 When value of LW1 is more than 150 the information of option High H is displayed The limit for option High of LW1 is 100 When value of LW1 is more than 100 and not more than 150 the information of option High is displayed i The limit for option Low of LW1 is 50 When value of LW1 is not less than 10 and less than 50 the information of option Low is displayed The limit for option Low L of LW1 is 10 When value of LW1 is less than 10 the information of option Low L is displayed Figure 7 21 Area division of four address values of LW1 VJ Low L when the address value of item is less than its limit and option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm VJ Low when the item value is equal to or greater than the limit for option Low L and is less than limit for option Low and the option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm J High when the item value is more than limit for option High and less than or equal to limit for option High H and the option Use is selected the alarm information of the item is displayed in Alarm Controls or Dynamic Alarm
342. u can draw straight connection 98 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 line in the window gt Move the mouse to a position where a straight connection line will be drawn left click the mouse once and then a small green dot will appear in the picture editing window This dot will be an end of the line to be drawn gt Move the mouse to another position in the screen and at this moment the system will draw a straight connection line automatically Left click or right click the mouse to complete straight connection line drawing See Figure 4 32 Figure 4 32 Drawing a straight connection line gt To change the position of the right angle of the connection line first choose the connection line and then move the mouse to the position of the line part to be moved If a horizontal part of the connection line is to be moved the mouse will become T If a vertical part of the connection line is to be moved the mouse will become Press down the left key of the mouse and drag the mouse to an appropriate position and then release the key to complete the process See Figure 4 33 Figure 4 33 Modifying a straight connection line gt After completing the above steps the straight connection line has default settings in transparency line type line width line color end arrow and end shape You can modify these settings basing on actual needs To do this move the mouse onto the straight connec
343. u click this button This function can be only used in screen pages Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 current window and open another window or screen Close Screen This function can be only used in window page It is used to close the current window page Change User Level When this option is checked you can change the user level after the screen 1s switched The new user level is the user level defined in the option of New User Level Login Required if Level is Insufficient If you have chosen Controlled by User Level option in Advanced tab of Screen dialog and changed the Effective Minimum Level then this Screen control can be touched only when the current user level is equal to or higher than the Effective Minimum Level set Otherwise a password input dialog will pop up when you touch this Screen control in the touch screen See Figure 4 62 Figure 4 62 Password input dialog The screen can be opened only when the level of the password entered is higher than that set by you and after the screen is opened the current user level is the level entered just now Use Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the screen button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list K The Label tab of Screen Button is the same as the Label tab of B
344. ugh programming cable Detailed connection diagram is as following Samkoon SA series touch screen IDEC MICRO Smart RS232 port RS232 communication port D female connector 8 pin male connector 381 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 9 pin female 8 pin male 2 Software setting Parameter settings are shown as following table PLC model IDEC Select the corresponding PLC for different models At present MICROSmart Samkoon SA series touch screen only supports IDEC MICRO FC series Smart FC series PLC Communication RS232 Adopt standard RS232 serial communication Port rate Baud rate 9600 Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 8 kinds of baud rates for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Samkoon SA series touch screen provides EVEN ODD NONE for selection but its setting must be same to PLC Checkout EVEN communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Stop bit i Samkoon SA series touch screen provides 1 2 stop bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted 382 Data bit T Samkoon SA series touch screen provides6 7 8 data bit for selection but its setting must be same to PLC communication port Generally the defaults are adopted Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 It is valid only when SA series
345. um value of ticks of Y axis Max Maximum value of ticks of Y axis Total Digits Maximum digits of the data displayed Fractional Digits Maximum fractional digits of the data displayed Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 3 XYTrend chart Overview of XYTrend chart Displaying continuous values of variables on a dynamic and continuous basis Reference curves for multiple data can be drawn Values of two continuous register addresses will be respectively used as the horizontal and vertical axis to visualize the change trend of the two values 8 polygonal lines can be displayed at most Steps to insert a XYTrend Chart are similar to that for Trend Chart so you can refer to the introduction above for reference The icon of XYTrend Chart in the tool bar is s Open the Properties dialog of XYTrend Chart and set parameters with reference to the parameter setting for Trend Chart It should be noted that in Trend Chart each pen presents the values of continuous addresses starting from write address and in XYTrend Chart each pen presents the values of two continuous addresses starting from write address For example If the data type is 16 digit data the number of data is 4 and the read address set by the user is LW3 then the values of 8 addresses will be read continuously that is LW3 X axis value of pen 1 LW4 Y axis value of pen 1 LWS X axis value of pen 2 LW6 Y axis value of pen 2 165
346. unication accuracy and reliability and supports RS232 485 and 422 communications 1 5 4 Memory module FLASH memory module with power failure protection is used as ROM with a capacity of 64 128M and with rapid memory access The capacity of RAM is 128M 15 Terminal Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 1 5 5 Power supply module High precision switch voltage stabilizing power supply is used with lower power consumption 1 6 Industrial environment Samkoon SA series touch screens meet the standards of EN50081 2 and EN50082 2 and the requirements of FCC Class A They have strong resistance against interference and meet the requirements of industrial application environment for electromagnetic compatibility 1 7 Technical parameters Detailed parameters of SA 3 5 a 3 5 length width 4 3 16 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Opening dimension 92x77 mm Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 4 3 es ee 4 3 length width 16 9 ee oe Brightness 400cd m 17 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Configuration software SamDraw V3 3 Detailed parameters of SA 5 7 BC Main technical parameters Display size 5 7 length width 4 3 5 7 length width 4 3 640x480 640x480 320 x234 640x480 640x480 320 x234 Brightness 400cd m 400cd m 262 144 pigments
347. ure 1 2 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 8A SA 8B The outline dimension is 239x192x49 5 and the installing opening dimension is 234x187 wu GEZ we EEZ se 6l una sgl The back Figure 1 2 Installing dimensions of SA 8A SA 8B Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Installing dimension of SA 7A Figure 1 3 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 7A The outline dimension is 216x150x40 5 and the installing opening dimension is 210x144 WE tir Installation opening size Figure 1 3 Installing dimensions of SA 7A Figure 1 8 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 7B The outline dimension is 202x144x40 and the installing opening dimension is 192x138 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 202 mm oe bhi NNT OOGA es wu BE The back Installation opening size Figure 1 8 Installing dimensions of SA 7B Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Installing dimension of SA 5 7 Figure 1 4 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 5 7A SA 5 7B SA 5 7C The outline dimension is 172x140x60 and the installing opening dimension is 163x133 172 mm ww OF lt eee Front uu EET The back Installation opening size Figure 1 4 Installing dimensions of SA 5 7 Figure 1 9 shows the product dimensions mm of SA 5 7D SA 5 7E SA 5 7F Th
348. us logical operation which represents true and false with 1 and 0 respectively if statement The branch structure can be constituted with if statement It makes judgment according to the given conditions so as to confirm what branch program period is to be executed If statement of C language has three basic forms 1 The first form is basic form if expression statement It s semanteme if the expression value is true the following statement will be executed otherwise not 2 The second form is if else if expression statement 1 else statement 2 Semanteme if the expression value is true it will execute statement 1 otherwise statement 2 Input two integers and output the bigger one Judge a and b size with if else statement If a 212 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 is bigger it outputs a otherwise b 3 The third form is if else if form In the first two forms if statement is normally used for two branches When there are several branches for selection if else if statement is adopted Its basic form 1s if expression 1 statement 1 else if expression 2 statement 2 else if expression 3 Statement 3 else if expression m Statement m else Statement n Semanteme judge the expression value in sequence When a value is true it executes the corresponding statement Then it executes program out of if statement If all expressions
349. use will become N Draw a rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then the control will be displayed 135 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 4 7 Miulti state switch Multi state Switch has functions basically the same as the functions of Multi state Lamp except that in Multi state Switch data can be entered in addition to the display function The operations are as follows Click the Multi state Switch icon md will appear in the tool bar and then a dialog as shown in Figure 4 69 Bultistate Switch General Text Picture Advanced Visibility m E O State o Border Color Fis Color Bi Color Pattern in ead Data Type 16 Bit Unsigned Int Write Address Moni tor Address Identical to Write Address Monitor Address 5 Total States Macro Figure 4 69 Multi state Switch dialog In General tab you can choose different Date Types basing on the data monitored set a register address of the connected device for data writing in Write Address and set a register address of the connected device to be monitored in Monitor Address Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the Multi state switch is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list 136 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configura
350. used in any place allowing statement such as loop body 5 Void statement it is composed by semicolon only without actual function Relational expression and logical expression are two important expressions which are mainly used for judgment of conditional execution and loop execution C language provides many forms of conditional statement to form the branch structure 1 if statement is mainly for one way selection 2 if else statement is mainly for two way selection 3 if else 1f statement and switch statement are for multiway selection These forms of conditional statement are normally mutual substituted C language provides three loop statements 1 For statement is mainly used to assign initial value for loop variable step increment and loop structure of loop times 2 The loop times and control condition can be confirmed during loop process and the confirmed loop may use while or do while statement 3 Three loop statements can be nested mutually to form the nested loop The loops may be in parallel but not crossed 220 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 4 Branch statement can transfer the process out of loop body but it can not transfer process from outside to loop body 5 Avoid endless loop in the loop program That is to say the loop variable must be ensured to be modified during operation Change the loop condition to be false gradually thus finish the loop
351. value to a string Usage result DEC2ASCI source sizeof source Example short source 5678 char result result DEC2ASCH source 4 result O 5 result 1 6 result 2 7 result 3 Q 9 FLOAT2ASCII 243 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Description Convert a floating value to a string Usage result FLOAT2ASCII source Example float source 56 8 char result 4 result FLOAT2ASCII source result O S jresult 1 6 result 2 result 3 8 10 GETBIT Description Get bit value Usage GETBIT source result Example short source 0x5 bit pos 0 result result GETBIT source bit_pos result 1 11 GETCHARS This function is applied for free port communication only Description Get data from communication port PortID Serial Port ID COM1 0 COM2 1 Success return the count of chars fail return 1 Usage GETCHARS PortID Data Example 244 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 char Data 20 int Length checksum PortID Result Length 5 PortID 0 Result GETCHARS PortID Data 12 HEX2ASCII Description Convert a hexadecimal value to a string Usage HEX2ASCII source result start Example short source 0x5678 char result result HEX2ASCII source result O 5 result 1 6 result 2 7 result 3 8
352. w Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Communication port RS232 Baud rate 9600 Data bit length 7 Stop bit length i Parity check bit Even PLC address l Operational address range C C E ooo po fee o ooo ees fee paa par 232 255 Cddd 32 bit counter coil TV 0 127 T_V ddd Elapsed value of timer Elapsed value of 16 bit 0 127 read C V ddd counter Elapsed value of 32 bit CH V 232 255 read CH V ddd 7 counter 345 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 LMJ ddd indicates decimal ooo indicates octal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC e Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 15 m 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 346 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 13 Connecti
353. wards in direction module The monitoring address is D5 Maximum and minimum values are respectively 0 and 200 Value of other attributes 1s default value Click OK to display the controls on screen V Click the icon ASC word input and display in toolbar Then set appearance background color foreground color pattern and other attributes of the controls in popped up dialog box The write address is D2 And select options Monitor and Monitoring address is same to 257 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software write address Adjust the total number of words to 20 Values of other attributes are default value Click OK to display the controls on screen User Manual V3 3 A Recipe of function button alter user level touch voice macro historical data display file protection and HMI protection cannot be realized in off line simulation temporarily v The creation method of other controls is same to previous introduction Therefore detailed description is not given again After setting attribute of all controls click Save to save the project Then select Off line Simulation in menu Download of menu bar as shown in figure 6 7 Cucumnis and SeitiopevAdminixicator VES AAL cud ipar ntr MO dee EI PPilelF Boot iki View Drew Object Seer El Setting loenLond M Help H ee EACEA EE a 1 ee aE sca eh ws alge ee hile fae g A E E D oo nee Es SEFA SKA DT Ge
354. write address is LW1 the constant is 5 and the maximum value is 0 then each time this control is executed the value of LW1 will be deducted by 5 but will be no lower than 0 Use Macro If Use Macro option is checked a list of macros will be displayed and you can choose a macro so that this macro will be executed when the word button is pressed Only successfully compiled macros are displayed in the drop down list i The Label tab of Word Button is the same as the Label tab of Bit Button except that in the former there is not ON Text and ON Picture as Word Button has only one state Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Word Button When 32 digit data type is chosen for Word Button the save address occupies two characters For example when writing data to data register of Siemens PLCs and the write address is V10 the occupied addresses of the data register are V10 and V11 If you try using other controls to monitor the value of V11 there may be errors Thus pay attention to 32 digit data type to avoid mis operation over data and address The Advanced and Visibility tabs of Word Button are exactly the same as the Advanced and Visibility tabs of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Word Button gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become AA Draw a rectangle in the
355. y Direction When the Display Type is Horizontal you can choose Left or Right for this option When the Display Type is Vertical you can choose Up or Down for this option Blocks Blocks refer to the quantity of the flow units from 1 to 30 No border When this option is checked the border of the Flow Block will be hidden Speed Here you can choose Fast General or Slow Refer to Bit Button control for the use of Visibility tab 4 5 14 Timer Timer is a control that triggers specified function basing on time conditions In SamDraw3 3 timer is used as a control for trigger of macros Create a new Timer or double click an existing Timer to enter the property dialog as shown in Figure 4 105 184 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 Properties Run Condition Frequency Run Times Function Function Type Maora es Figure 4 105 Timer dialog Control Run Conditions Here you can set run conditions for macros either Always Perform or Address Triggered 1 Always Perform If this option is chosen the macros will be always executed in specified frequency 2 Address Triggered If this option is chosen then the macros will be executed when the value of the specified bit is 1 and will not be executed when the value is 0 Address When Address Triggered option is chosen there will be a box for address entering Enter here the bi
356. y center the graph objects chosen chosen Corresponding to The same width command used to set the same width for the graphs Corresponding to The same height command used to set the same height for the graphs chosen c6 99 Corresponding to The same height and width command used to set the same height and 54 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 width for the graphs chosen f Corresponding to Equal horizontal space command used to arrange two or more controls at equal horizontal space mr Corresponding to Equal vertical space command used to arrange two or more controls at equal vertical space A Corresponding to Horizontal overturning command used to overturn the chosen graph s with the axis of the vertical center line gt Corresponding to Vertical overturning command used to overturn the chosen graph s with the axis of the horizontal center line Hi Corresponding to Grid command used to set and cancel in the current screen grids whose widths have been selected Corresponding to Border scale command used to add or cancel scale lines on the left top corner of the picture window i Corresponding to Zoom in command used to zoom in the current screen by Ix For further zoom in click this button again Corresponding to Recover command used to recover the
357. y relay G 17680 readwrite Ddd T 256 read write Tada 1128 readwrite Cdd O ooo 397 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 ddd indicates the decimal Different PLC models support different registers subjecting to actual register of PLC Communication failure analysis lt 1 gt Communication connection is hard to establish 1 Check the PLC is powered up or not 2 Communication cable is used or not 3 Communication parameter setting is accurate or not 4 Check the operation for a register is out of range or not lt 2 gt How to remove the unreliable communication Communication unreliability instability if the communication state is 0 or 1 ever and again it indicates the communication is unreliable The possible reasons include 1 The communication distance is too far it is not more than 500 m for RS422 communication and not more than 15 m for RS232 communication 2 Ifthe PLC is assured the connection may be connected with PLC via programming software Please contact with Shenzhen Samkoon 398 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 10 28 Connection between TAIAN TP03 Series PLC and Samkoon SA series touch screen This device driver is used to read and write the data or state of TP03 Series PLC register by Samkoon series touch screen It establishes serial communication connection with the programming port of TP03 Se
358. you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Bit Lamp 3 If Word Bit or Double Word Bit is chosen as Date Type there will be a bit number selection dialog The bit number for Word Bit is 0 15 and the bit number for Double Word Bit is 0 31 The Bit Lamp determines whether to display 0 or 1 state basing on the bit number For example if Word Bit is chosen the monitored address is LW1 the current value of LW1 is 23 as 23 is a decimal digit corresponding to a binary digit of 10111 when 3 is chosen as the bit number the system will count from 0 from right to left and check the value of digit 3 If the value of this digit is 0 then 0 state will be displayed if it is 1 then 1 state will be displayed In this case the value of digit 3 is 0 so the bit lamp will display O state if the value of the 131 Shenzhen Samkoon s SamDraw Configuration Software User Manual V3 3 monitored address is 23 and the bit number is 3 4 To reset the properties of the bit lamp double click the graph of the bit lamp and set new parameters in the property dialog opened 1 The Visibility tab of Bit Lamp is exactly the same as the Visibility tab of Bit Button Thus you can refer to the introduction of Bit Button control for some settings of Bit Lamp gt After setting of these parameters click OK and then the mouse will become iL rectangle in the picture area by left clicking the mouse and then

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  Franke FCB 3401 NS XS  Philips Professional LCD TV 26HFL3350D  installation and service manual for the slimline ii, juice dispenser  Newsletter Mars 2015 .    平成12年（ネ）第3811号，同第3812号  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file